Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet
Switches
Published: 2010-08-11
Revision 9
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase
order or, to the extent applicable, to any reseller agreement or end-user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks.
By using this software, you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions.
Generally speaking, the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions
against certain uses. The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated. You should consult
the license for further details.
For complete product documentation, please see the Juniper Networks Web site at www.juniper.net/techpubs.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iii
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE.
BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS
CONTAINED HEREIN, YOU (AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER, AS A REPRESENTATIVE/AGENT AUTHORIZED TO
BIND THE CUSTOMER) CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED
HEREIN, THEN (A) DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE, AND (B) YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS
REGARDING LICENSE TERMS.
1. The Parties. The parties to this Agreement are (i) Juniper Networks, Inc. (if the Customer’s principal office is located in the Americas) or
Juniper Networks (Cayman) Limited (if the Customer’s principal office is located outside the Americas) (such applicable entity being referred
to herein as “Juniper”), and (ii) the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable
license(s) for use of the Software (“Customer”) (collectively, the “Parties”).
2. The Software. In this Agreement, “Software” means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper-supplied software, for
which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller, or which was embedded by
Juniper in equipment which Customer purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller. “Software” also includes updates, upgrades
and new releases of such software. “Embedded Software” means Software which Juniper has embedded in or loaded onto the Juniper
equipment and any updates, upgrades, additions or replacements which are subsequently embedded in or loaded onto the equipment.
3. License Grant. Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein, Juniper grants to Customer
a non-exclusive and non-transferable license, without right to sublicense, to use the Software, in executable form only, subject to the
following use restrictions:
a. Customer shall use Embedded Software solely as embedded in, and for execution on, Juniper equipment originally purchased by
Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
b. Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit, or as many chassis or processing units
for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees; provided, however, with respect to the Steel-Belted Radius or Odyssey Access
Client software only, Customer shall use such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space
and containing any number of processors. Use of the Steel-Belted Radius or IMS AAA software on multiple computers or virtual machines
(e.g., Solaris zones) requires multiple licenses, regardless of whether such computers or virtualizations are physically contained on a single
chassis.
c. Product purchase documents, paper or electronic user documentation, and/or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may
specify limits to Customer’s use of the Software. Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats, registered endpoints, concurrent
users, sessions, calls, connections, subscribers, clusters, nodes, realms, devices, links, ports or transactions, or require the purchase of
separate licenses to use particular features, functionalities, services, applications, operations, or capabilities, or provide throughput,
performance, configuration, bandwidth, interface, processing, temporal, or geographical limits. In addition, such limits may restrict the use
of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software.
Customer’s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses.
d. For any trial copy of the Software, Customer’s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download, installation or use of the
Software. Customer may operate the Software after the 30-day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so. Customer may not
extend or create an additional trial period by re-installing the Software after the 30-day trial period.
e. The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer’s
enterprise network. Specifically, service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the
Steel-Belted Radius software to support any commercial network access services.
The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer. No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase
the applicable license(s) for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.
4. Use Prohibitions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to, and Customer agrees
not to and shall not: (a) modify, unbundle, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software; (b) make unauthorized
copies of the Software (except as necessary for backup purposes); (c) rent, sell, transfer, or grant any rights in and to any copy of the
Software, in any form, to any third party; (d) remove any proprietary notices, labels, or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product
in which the Software is embedded; (e) distribute any copy of the Software to any third party, including as may be embedded in Juniper
equipment sold in the secondhand market; (f) use any ‘locked’ or key-restricted feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability
without first purchasing the applicable license(s) and obtaining a valid key from Juniper, even if such feature, function, service, application,
operation, or capability is enabled without a key; (g) distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party; (h) use the
iv
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (i)
use Embedded Software on non-Juniper equipment; (j) use Embedded Software (or make it available for use) on Juniper equipment that
the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (k) disclose the results of testing or benchmarking
of the Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Juniper; or (l) use the Software in any manner other than as expressly
provided herein.
5. Audit. Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement. Upon request by Juniper,
Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement.
6. Confidentiality. The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper.
As such, Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence,
which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software
for Customer’s internal business purposes.
7. Ownership. Juniper and Juniper’s licensors, respectively, retain ownership of all right, title, and interest (including copyright) in and to
the Software, associated documentation, and all copies of the Software. Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance
of any right, title, or interest in the Software or associated documentation, or a sale of the Software, associated documentation, or copies
of the Software.
8. Warranty, Limitation of Liability, Disclaimer of Warranty. The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty
statement that accompanies the Software (the “Warranty Statement”). Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support
the Software. Support services may be purchased separately. Any such support shall be governed by a separate, written support services
agreement. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA,
ORCOSTSORPROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES, ORFORANYSPECIAL, INDIRECT, ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER
BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT DOES
JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, WILL OPERATE WITHOUT
ERROR OR INTERRUPTION, OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK. In no event shall Juniper’s or its suppliers’
or licensors’ liability to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of warranty, or otherwise, exceed the price paid
by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim, or if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product, the price paid by
Customer for such other product. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in
reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein, that the same reflect an allocation of risk between
the Parties (including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss), and that the same
form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties.
9. Termination. Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination
of the license granted herein. Upon such termination, Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related
documentation in Customer’s possession or control.
10. Taxes. All license fees payable under this agreement are exclusive of tax. Customer shall be responsible for paying Taxes arising from
the purchase of the license, or importation or use of the Software. If applicable, valid exemption documentation for each taxing jurisdiction
shall be provided to Juniper prior to invoicing, and Customer shall promptly notify Juniper if their exemption is revoked or modified. All
payments made by Customer shall be net of any applicable withholding tax. Customer will provide reasonable assistance to Juniper in
connection with such withholding taxes by promptly: providing Juniper with valid tax receipts and other required documentation showing
Customer’s payment of any withholding taxes; completing appropriate applications that would reduce the amount of withholding tax to
be paid; and notifying and assisting Juniper in any audit or tax proceeding related to transactions hereunder. Customer shall comply with
all applicable tax laws and regulations, and Customer will promptly pay or reimburse Juniper for all costs and damages related to any
liability incurred by Juniper as a result of Customer’s non-compliance or delay with its responsibilities herein. Customer’s obligations under
this Section shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement.
11. Export. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any
applicable foreign agency or authority, and not to export or re-export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such
restrictions, laws or regulations, or without all necessary approvals. Customer shall be liable for any such violations. The version of the
Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting Customer’s ability to export the Software without
an export license.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
v
12. Commercial Computer Software. The Software is “commercial computer software” and is provided with restricted rights. Use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS
227.7201 through 227.7202-4, FAR 12.212, FAR 27.405(b)(2), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) as applicable.
13. Interface Information. To the extent required by applicable law, and at Customer's written request, Juniper shall provide Customer
with the interface information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program, on
payment of applicable fee, if any. Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use
such information in compliance with any applicable terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available.
14. Third Party Software. Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products
or technology are embedded in (or services are accessed by) the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement,
and such licensor or vendor shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper. In addition, certain third party
software may be provided with the Software and is subject to the accompanying license(s), if any, of its respective owner(s). To the extent
portions of the Software are distributed under and subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such
portions publicly available (such as the GNU General Public License (“GPL”) or the GNU Library General Public License (“LGPL”)), Juniper
will make such source code portions (including Juniper modifications, as appropriate) available upon request for a period of up to three
years from the date of distribution. Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks, Inc., 1194 N. Mathilda Ave., Sunnyvale, CA
94089, ATTN: General Counsel. You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html, and a copy of the LGPL
15. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws
principles. The provisions of the U.N. Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. For any disputes
arising under this Agreement, the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal
courts within Santa Clara County, California. This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer
with respect to the Software, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software, whether oral or written
(including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order), except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an
authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained
herein. No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing
by the party to be charged. If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid, the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity
of the remainder of this Agreement. This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language, and the
Parties agree that the English version will govern. (For Canada: Les parties aux présentés confirment leur volonté que cette convention de
même que tous les documents y compris tout avis qui s'y rattaché, soient redigés en langue anglaise. (Translation: The parties confirm that
this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language)).
vi
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
About This Topic Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
How to Use This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Documentation Symbols Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Requesting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Opening a Case with JTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
EX8208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EX8208 Switch Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chassis Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Routing Engines and Switch Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EX8208 Switch Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Switch Fabric Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LCD Panel in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LCD Panel Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LCD Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chassis Status LEDs in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SRE Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Management Port LEDs in EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Switch Fabric (SF) Module in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SF Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
8-port SFP+ Line Card in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
40-port SFP+ Line Card in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
48-port SFP Line Card in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
48-port RJ-45 Line Card in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Network Port LEDs in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
AC Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Backplane in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Site Preparation Checklist for an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rack Requirements for an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DC Power Specifications for EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
viii
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Unpacking an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Installing an SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Installing an SF Module in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing a Line Card in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Powering On an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ix
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuring the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
EX8200 Switch Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Powering Off an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Holding a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Storing a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
x
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Packing an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Packing a Line Card Used in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Radiation and Laser Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
General Laser Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Class 1 Laser Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Class 1 LED Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Laser Beam Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Battery Handling Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Jewelry Removal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Lightning Activity Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operating Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Product Disposal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xi
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Compliance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
FCC Part 15 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Declaration of Conformity for EX8208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
xii
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures
EX8208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Figure 1: EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure 2: EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 3: Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 5: LCD Panel in an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 6: Chassis Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 7: SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 10: SF Module in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 11: SF Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 12: 8-port SFP+ Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 13: 40-port SFP+ Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 15: 48-port SFP Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 16: 48-port RJ-45 Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 19: Status LEDs on a 48-port SFP Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 25: AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 26: Power Retainer for an AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 28: DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 30: Fan Tray for an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
an EX8208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 37: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 38: Pallet Fastener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 39: Unpacking an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 40: Unpacking an EX8216 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 54: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 60: Installing a Line Card with a 2-in. Ejector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 61: Installing a Line Card with a 4-in. Ejector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 62: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
xiv
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 71: Flip the Enable Switch to the ON position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 72: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
a Console Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 75: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 76: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 82: Remove the Plastic Cable Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 93: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xv
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
and 3000 W DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
EX8216 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
EX8216 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 111: Insert Pallet Fasteners in the Cardboard Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 112: Packing an EX8200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
xvi
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Tables
EX8208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table 1: EX8208 Switch Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 5: Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 9: FRUs in an EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xvii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cards Used in EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cards Used in EX8200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 35: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 36: Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 37: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
EX8216 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
EX8208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
xviii
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Tables
OS Release 10.2 or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Table 50: Power Reserved for the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table 53: Accessory Box Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 54: Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xix
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
xx
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Topic Collection
•
•
•
•
•
•
How to Use This Guide
Complete documentation for the EX Series product family is provided on webpages at
webpages and created a number of EX Series guides that collect related topics into a
book-like format so that the information is easy to print and easy to download to your
local computer.
This guide, Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Switches, collects together information
about the EX8208 switches. The release notes are at
List of EX Series Guides for Junos OS Release 10.3
Title
Description
Complete Hardware Guide for EX2200 Switches
Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX2200 switches
Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Complete Hardware Guide for EX4500 Switches
Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX3200 and EX4200 switches
Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX4500 switches
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Title
Description
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Switches
Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX8208 switches
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8216 Switches
Component descriptions, site preparation, installation,
replacement, and safety and compliance information
for EX8216 switches
Complete Software Guide for Junos® OS for EX Series Switches, Release Software feature descriptions, configuration examples,
and tasks for Junos OS for EX Series switches
10.3
Software feature descriptions, configuration examples
and tasks, and reference pages for configuration
statements and operational commands (This
information also appears in the Complete Software
Guide for Junos® OS for EX Series Switches, Release
10.3.)
Software Topic Collections
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Access Control
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Configuration
Management
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Class of Service
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Device Security
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Ethernet Switching
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Interfaces
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Layer 3 Protocols
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: MPLS
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Multicast
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Network Management
and Monitoring
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Port Security
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Power Management
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Routing Policy and
Packet Filtering
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Software Installation
xxii
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Topic Collection
Title
Description
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Spanning-Tree Protocols
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Monitoring
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Services
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: System Setup
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: User and Access
Management
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: User Interfaces
JUNOS® OS for EX Series Switches, Release 10.3: Virtual Chassis
Downloading Software
You can download Junos OS for EX Series switches from the Download Software area
have a Juniper Networks user account. For information about obtaining an account, see
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xxiii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Documentation Symbols Key
Notice Icons
Icon
Meaning
Description
Informational note
Indicates important features or instructions.
Caution
Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware
damage.
Warning
Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.
Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
Laser warning
Text and Syntax Conventions
Convention
Description
Examples
Bold text like this
Represents text that you type.
To enter configuration mode, type the
configure command:
user@host> configure
Fixed-width text like this
Represents output that appears on the
terminal screen.
user@host> show chassis alarms
No alarms currently active
Italic text like this
•
•
•
Introduces important new terms.
Identifies book names.
•
•
•
A policy term is a named structure that
defines match conditions and actions.
Junos System Basics Configuration
Guide
Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles.
RFC 1997, BGP Communities Attribute
Italic text like this
Represents variables (options for which
you substitute a value) in commands or
configuration statements.
Configure the machine’s domain name:
[edit]
root@# set system domain-name
domain-name
Plain text like this
Represents names of configuration
statements, commands, files, and
directories; IP addresses; configuration
hierarchy levels; or labels on routing
platform components.
•
•
To configure a stub area, include the
stub statement at the [edit protocols
ospf area area-id] hierarchy level.
The console port is labeled CONSOLE.
< > (angle brackets)
Enclose optional keywords or variables.
stub <default-metric metric>;
xxiv
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Topic Collection
Text and Syntax Conventions
Convention
Description
Examples
| (pipe symbol)
Indicates a choice between the mutually
exclusive keywords or variables on either
side of the symbol. The set of choices is
often enclosed in parentheses for clarity.
broadcast | multicast
(string1 | string2 | string3)
# (pound sign)
Indicates a comment specified on the
same line as the configuration statement
to which it applies.
rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only
[ ] (square brackets)
Enclose a variable for which you can
substitute one or more values.
community name members [
community-ids ]
Indention and braces ( { } )
Identify a level in the configuration
hierarchy.
[edit]
routing-options {
static {
route default {
nexthop address;
retain;
}
}
}
; (semicolon)
Identifies a leaf statement at a
configuration hierarchy level.
J-Web GUI Conventions
Bold text like this
Represents J-Web graphical user
interface (GUI) items you click or select.
•
•
In the Logical Interfaces box, select All
Interfaces.
To cancel the configuration, click
Cancel.
> (bold right angle bracket)
Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Web
selections.
In the configuration editor hierarchy,
select Protocols>Ospf.
Documentation Feedback
We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can
following:
•
Document URL or title
•
Page number if applicable
•
Software version
•
Your name and company
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xxv
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Requesting Technical Support
Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or JNASC support contract,
or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support, you can access
our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.
•
JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,
review the JTAC User Guide located at
•
Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit
•
JTAC hours of operation—The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year.
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources
For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online
self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides you with the
following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:
•
Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:
•
Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:
•
To verify service entitlement by product serial number, use our Serial Number Entitlement
Opening a Case with JTAC
You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone.
•
•
Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).
For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see
xxvi
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
2
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1
EX8208 Switch Overview
•
•
•
•
•
EX8208 Switch Hardware Overview
Juniper Networks EX8208 Ethernet Switches provide high performance, scalable
connectivity, and carrier-class reliability for high-density environments such as
campus-aggregation and data-center networks. The EX8208 switch is a modular system
that provides high availability and redundancy for all major hardware components,
including Routing Engines, switch fabric, fan tray, and power supplies.
You can manage EX8208 switches using the same interfaces that you use for managing
other devices running the Juniper Networks Junos operating system (Junos OS)—the
command-line interface (CLI), the J-Web graphical interface, and the Network and
Security Manager (NSM).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Software
The Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches run under the Juniper Networks Junos
OS, which provides Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching, routing, and security services. The
same Junos OS code base that runs on EX Series switches also runs on all Juniper
Networks J Series, M Series, MX Series, and T Series routers.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Chassis Physical Specifications
The EX8208 switch is 14 rack units (14 U) in size (1/3 rack); three EX8208 switches can
fit in a standard 42 U rack. Each EX8208 switch is designed to optimize rack space and
Figure 1: EX8208 Switch
The EX8208 switch has a chassis-level LCD panel that displays Routing Engine and
switch fabric status as well as chassis components’ alarm information for rapid problem
identification. The LCD panel provides a user-friendly interface for performing initial
switch configuration, rolling back a configuration, or restoring the switch to its default
The EX8208 chassis backplane distributes the data, control, and management signals
to various system components along with distributing power throughout the system.
4
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
Routing Engines and Switch Fabric
Switching functionality, system management, and system control functions of an EX8208
switch are performed by a Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module. See “Switch
module contains a Routing Engine and switch fabric. The SRE modules are installed in
the front of the chassis in the slots labeled SRE0 and SRE1. See “Slot Numbering for an
EX8208 Switch” on page 13. A base configuration EX8208 switch has one SRE module.
A redundant configuration EX8208 switch has a second SRE module. See “EX8208
The Switch Fabric (SF) module, working with the SRE module, provides the necessary
switching functionality to a base configuration EX8208 switch. The SF module is installed
in the front of the chassis in the slot labeled SF. In a redundant configuration the SF
module provides a redundant switch fabric. The additional switch fabric provides full 2+1
switch fabric redundancy to the switch. See “Switch Fabric (SF) Module in an EX8208
Line Cards
The EX8208 switch features eight horizontal line card slots and supports the line rate
for each line card. The line cards in EX8200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding
Engine and Ethernet interfaces on a single assembly. Line cards are field-replaceable
units (FRUs) that can be installed in the line card slots labeled 0 through 7 on the front
cards are hot-removable and hot-insertable.
The following line cards are available for EX8208 switches:
•
8-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ line card: This line card has eight 10-gigabit SFP+
ports on its faceplate in which you can install SFP+ transceivers. See “8-port SFP+
•
40-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ line card: This line card has 40 10-gigabit SFP+ ports
on its faceplate in which you can install either SFP+ or SFP transceivers. See “40-port
•
48-port 100/1000 SFP line card: This line card has 48 1-gigabit SFP ports on its
faceplate in which you can install SFP transceivers. See “48-port SFP Line Card in an
•
48-port 10/100/1000 RJ-45 line card: This line card had 48 10/100/1000 Gigabit
Ethernet ports with RJ-45 connectors on its faceplate. See “48-port RJ-45 Line Card
Cooling System
The cooling system in an EX8208 switch consists of a hot-removable and hot-insertable
fan tray. The fan tray contains 12 fans. The fan tray installs vertically on the left front of
the chassis and provides side-to-side chassis cooling. See “Cooling System and Airflow
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Power Supplies
Power supplies for the EX8208 switch are fully redundant, load-sharing, and
hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units (FRUs). Each EX8208 switch
chassis can hold up to six 2000 W AC, six 3000 W AC, or six 2000 W DC power supplies.
The 2000 W AC power supplies support both low-voltage line (100–120 VAC) and
high-voltage line (200–240 VAC) AC power configurations on an EX8208 switch. Each
2000 W AC power supply delivers 2000 W of power at high-voltage line (200–240 VAC)
or 1200 W at low-voltage line (100–120 VAC) to the EX8208 chassis.
Each 3000 W AC power supply delivers 3000 W of power at high-voltage line (200–240
VAC) input to the EX8208 chassis. Low-voltage line input is not supported for the 3000
W AC power supplies on the EX8208 switch.
Each DC power supply delivers 2000 W of power to the chassis when the input voltage
is in the range –40 VDC through –72 VDC.
Only two AC power supplies are required for the base AC configuration and switch
powerup. The redundant AC configuration ships with six AC power supplies to provide
the capacity to power the system using N+1 or N+N power redundancy. See “AC Power
The redundant DC configuration ships with four DC power supplies. The dual inputs of
the DC supplies provide direct support for N+N power redundancy. The redundant
configuration also provides sufficient capacity for N+1 redundancy in most configurations;
if necessary, up to two additional DC supplies can be added to the system. See “DC Power
CAUTION: Mixing different types of power supplies in the same chassis is not supported.
Related Topics
•
•
•
EX8208 Switch Configurations
switch—base (AC), redundant (AC and DC versions), and fully loaded chassis (AC and
DC versions)—and the components included in each configuration.
The switch is shipped in only four of these seven configurations: base (AC with 2000 W
AC power supplies), base (AC with 3000 W AC power supplies), redundant (AC with
2000 W AC power supplies), and redundant (DC).
6
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
Table 1: EX8208 Switch Hardware Configurations
Switch Configuration
Configuration Components
Base configuration (AC with 2000 W AC power supplies)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
One Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module
One Switch Fabric (SF) module
Two 2000 W AC power supplies
Two power cords
Eight line card cover panels
Four power supply cover panels
Base configuration (AC with 3000 W AC power supplies)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
One Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module
One Switch Fabric (SF) module
Two 3000 W AC power supplies
Two power cords
Eight line card cover panels
Four power supply cover panels
Redundant configuration (AC with 2000 W AC power supplies)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
Two SRE modules
One SF module
Six 2000 W AC power supplies
Six power cords
Eight line card cover panels
Redundant configuration (DC)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
Two SRE modules
One SF module
Four 2000 W DC power supplies
16 DC power cable lugs
Eight line card cover panels
Fully loaded chassis configuration (AC with 2000 W AC power
supplies)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
Two SRE modules
One SF module
Six 2000 W AC power supplies
Six power cords
Eight line cards
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 1: EX8208 Switch Hardware Configurations (continued)
Switch Configuration
Configuration Components
Fully loaded chassis configuration (AC with 3000 W AC power
supplies)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
Two SRE modules
One SF module
Six 3000 W AC power supplies
Six power cords
Eight line cards
Fully loaded chassis configuration (DC)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane
One fan tray
Two SRE modules
One SF module
Six 2000 W DC power supplies
24 DC power cable lugs
Eight line cards
NOTE: You can install up to eight line cards (any combination of line cards) in the
switch.
NOTE: Line cards are not part of the base or redundant configuration. You must order
them separately.
NOTE: If you want to purchase additional power supplies (AC or DC) for your switch
configuration, you must order them separately.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8208 Switch
The EX8208 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the other switch
Table 2: Physical Specifications of the EX8208 Switch Chassis
Description
Chassis height
Chassis width
Value
24.25 in. (61.6 cm)
•
•
17.25 in. (43.82 cm)
The outer edges of the front-mounting brackets extend the width to 19 in. (48.3 cm).
Chassis depth
Weight
•
•
20 in. (50.8 cm)
The depth from the front-mounting bracket to chassis rear is 20.69 in. (52.6 cm).
•
•
•
•
Chassis with backplane: 89 lb (41 kg)
Base configuration: 149 lb (68 kg)
Redundant configuration: 187 lb (85 kg)
Fully loaded chassis: 284 lb (129 kg)
NOTE: The fully loaded chassis weight includes the heaviest line cards in all eight
slots. If your switch configuration has lighter line cards, the fully loaded chassis weight
will be in the 268–284 lb (122–129 kg) range.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 2: EX8208 Switch
You can mount an EX8200 switch on a standard 19-in. four-post rack or a standard
800-mm enclosed cabinet. Up to three EX8208 switches can be installed in a standard
(42 rack unit (U)) rack provided the rack can handle their combined weight.
Lift handles are provided on either side of the switch to facilitate the handling of a chassis
with only the backplane installed.
WARNING: Do not use the lift handles to lift the chassis unless the chassis is empty
(that is, contains only the backplane). Failure to heed this warning can result in injury.
Mechanical Lift” on page 143 for instructions for moving a loaded chassis.
Related Topics
•
•
•
10
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
•
Understanding EX8208 Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy
The Juniper Networks EX8208 Ethernet Switch is available as a fully redundant system.
A redundant EX8208 switch configuration is designed so that no single point of failure
This topic describes:
•
•
•
Hardware Components That Provide Redundancy
The following hardware components provide redundancy to an EX8208 switch:
•
SRE modules—An EX8208 switch can have either one Switch Fabric and Routing
Engine (SRE) module or two SRE modules. If two SRE modules are installed, one SRE
module functions as the master and the other functions as the backup. If the master
SRE module fails or is removed the backup module takes over as the master SRE
module.
When the SRE modules are configured for graceful switchover, the backup SRE module
automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with those of the master SRE
module. Any update to the master SRE module is replicated on the backup SRE module.
If the backup module assumes mastership, packet forwarding continues through the
switch.
•
Power supplies—You can install up to six AC or six DC power supplies in an EX8208
switch. Each power supply connects to the backplane of the chassis, which distributes
the output power produced by the power supplies to different switch components.
to all the components in the switch.
An N+1 power configuration is required for Juniper Networks EX8200 Ethernet Switches.
In an N+1 power configuration, if one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining
power supplies continue to supply power for the entire system without interruption. If
dual power feed redundancy is required, the required power configuration is N+N. The
DC power supplies provide independent A and B power feeds so that dual power
redundancy is available even in an N+1 power configuration. See “AC Power Supply in
•
Cooling system—The cooling system in an EX8200 switch consists of a single fan tray.
The fan tray contains 12 fans. Under normal operating conditions, the fans in the fan
tray run at less than full speed.
The fans are controlled by two fan tray controllers. The fans are numbered 1 through
12. Fans 1 through 6 are controlled by the first fan tray controller. Fans 7 through 12 are
controlled by the second fan tray controller. If one fan tray controller fails, the other
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
fan tray controller keeps half the fans working. This allows the switch to continue to
operate normally as long as the remaining fans cool the chassis sufficiently.
The fan tray continues to operate indefinitely and provides sufficient cooling even when
a single fan fails provided the room temperature is within the operating range. See
Routing Engine and Control Redundancy
Each SRE module contains switch fabric circuitry, Routing Engine circuitry, and switch
control and management circuitry. An EX8208 switch can have one SRE module or two
SRE modules. If a switch has two SRE modules, one functions as the master while the
other functions as a backup and is in standby mode. This provides the switch with full
redundancy (1+1) for Routing Engine and switch control functionality.
Engine and control redundancy associated with different SRE module and Switch Fabric
(SF) module combinations.
Table 3: Routing Engine and Control Redundancy for EX8208 Switches
Routing Engine and
Control Redundancy
Switch Configuration Slot SRE0
Slot SRE1
Empty
Slot SF
Base configuration
Base configuration
SRE module
Empty
SF module
SF module
Empty
No
No
Yes
SRE module
SRE module
User-defined
configuration
SRE module
Redundant
SRE module
SRE module
SF module
Yes
configuration
Switch Fabric Redundancy
The switch fabric circuitry in an EX8208 switch is distributed across three modules—two
SRE modules and one SF module. Any two of these three modules must be installed and
functional to provide a working switch fabric with no redundancy. The third module, when
present, provides partial redundancy (2+1) for the switching functionality, such that if
any one of the two functional modules becomes nonoperational, the third module takes
over.
redundancy associated with different SRE module and SF module combinations.
Table 4: Switch Fabric Redundancy for EX8208 Switches
Switch Fabric
Redundancy
Switch Configuration Slot SRE0
Base configuration SRE module
Slot SRE1
Slot SF
Empty
SF module
No
12
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
Table 4: Switch Fabric Redundancy for EX8208 Switches (continued)
Switch Fabric
Redundancy
Switch Configuration Slot SRE0
Slot SRE1
Slot SF
SF module
Empty
Base configuration
Empty
SRE module
SRE module
No
No
User-defined
configuration
SRE module
Redundant
SRE module
SRE module
SF module
Yes
configuration
Related Topics
•
•
Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch
An EX8208 chassis accepts eight line cards, two Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE)
modules, one Switch Fabric (SF) module, one fan tray, and six power supplies (AC or
DC). All 11 slots for the line cards and the modules run horizontally across the front of the
chassis. The fan tray slot runs vertically on the left of the chassis front. The six power
supply slots run vertically across the front bottom of the chassis.
This topic describes:
•
•
Slot Numbering for SRE and SF Module Slots and Line Card Slots
those slots accept.
Table 5: Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch
Slot Label
Components Accepted in Slot
0
Line card
1
Line card
2
Line card
3
Line card
SRE0
SF
SRE module
SF module
SRE1
SRE module
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 5: Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch (continued)
Slot Label
Components Accepted in Slot
4
5
6
7
Line card
Line card
Line card
Line card
Figure 3 on page 14 shows the slot numbering, which is on the front left of the chassis.
Figure 3: Slot Numbering for an EX8208 Switch
Slots 0 through 7 accept one of the line cards available. See “Installing a Line Card in an
Slots SRE0 and SRE1 accept only the SRE module. You can install one SRE module or
two SRE modules based on the configuration of your switch. See “Switch Fabric and
14
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: EX8208 Switch Overview
NOTE: We recommend that you install two SRE modules for redundancy. If you install
only one SRE module, we recommend that you install it in the slot SRE0. See “Installing
Slot SF accepts only the SF module. See “Switch Fabric (SF) Module in an EX8208
Switch” on page 28. An EX8208 switch can have either zero SF modules or one SF module
based on your switch configuration. The SF module is keyed so that it does not fit in any
Slot Numbering for the Power Supply Slots
The chassis has six vertical slots on its front bottom. You can install up to six power
supplies (either all AC or all DC) in these slots, which are labeled PSU 0 through PSU 5
CAUTION: Mixing different types of power supplies in the same chassis is not a supported
configuration.
Table 6: Slot Numbering for Power Supply Slots on an EX8208 Switch Chassis Front
Slot Label
PSU 0
PSU 1
Components Accepted in Slot
Power supply
Power supply
PSU 2
Power supply
PSU 3
Power supply
PSU 4
PSU 5
Power supply
Power supply
Figure 4 on page 16 shows the slot numbering for the power supply slots in an EX8208
switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 4: Slot Numbering for Power Supply Slots on an EX8208 Switch
Chassis Front
NOTE: Power supplies can be installed in any slot. You do not have to install them in
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
16
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2
Component Descriptions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LCD Panel in an EX8200 Switch
The LCD panel on the top front of the EX8200 switch chassis shows two lines of text
with a maximum of 16 characters in each line. The LCD panel displays a variety of
information about the switch and provides menu options to perform basic operations
such as initial configuration and switch reboot.
There are two navigation buttons—Menu and Enter—to the right of the LCD panel.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 5: LCD Panel in an EX8200 Switch
You can configure the second line of the LCD panel to display a custom message. If the
LCD panel is configured to display a custom message, the Menu button and the Enter
button are disabled. See Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).
The LCD panel has a backlight. If the LCD panel is idle for 60 seconds, the backlight turns
off. You can turn on the backlight by pressing the Menu or Enter button once. After turning
on the backlight, you can toggle between the LCD menus by pressing the Menu button
and navigate through the menu options by pressing the Enter button.
NOTE: The chassis viewer in the J-Web interface also displays the LCD panel. From the
J-Web interface, you can view real-time status information in the LCD panel. See
Dashboard for EX Series Switches.
This topic describes:
•
•
LCD Panel Modes
The LCD operates in four modes: boot, idle, status, and maintenance.
The LCD operates in boot mode during switch reboot.
The boot mode displays the key milestones in the switch boot process. The boot mode
does not have any menu options. After the boot process is complete, the LCD
automatically reverts to the Idle menu.
In the idle mode, line two of the Idle menu displays the network ports’ Status LED modes
and the total number of alarms in the system. The number of alarms is updated every
second.
The status mode allows you to get status information for the following items:
•
Switch fabric in Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) modules in EX8208 switches
•
Routing Engine (RE) and switch fabric in Switch Fabric (SF) module(s) in EX8216
switches
•
Power supplies
•
Fan tray(s) and chassis temperature
•
Junos OS version installed
18
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
The maintenance mode allows you to cycle through options for configuring and
troubleshooting the switch:
•
System halt
•
Reboot system
•
Load rescue configuration
•
Revert to factory configuration
•
EZSetup
LCD Panel Menus
The LCD has three menus: Idle, Status, and Maintenance. In each of these menus, line
one of the LCD panel displays the hostname of the switch. Toggle between the LCD
menus by pressing the Menu button. Navigate through the menu options by pressing the
Enter button.
Table 7: LCD Panel Menu Options for the EX8200 Switch
Menu
Description
Idle
In the Idle menu:
•
Press Enter to cycle through the Status LED modes, which are port status indicators:
•
•
•
ADM (enabled/disabled)
SPD (speed)
DPX (duplex)
•
Press Menu to exit the Idle menu and go to the Status menu.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 7: LCD Panel Menu Options for the EX8200 Switch (continued)
Menu
Description
Status
The Status menu has the following options:
•
Switch fabric status—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to display the status of the switch fabric in the SRE modules (SRE0 and SRE1) in EX8208
switches and the SF modules (SF) in EX8216 switches: OK, Fld (failed), ABS (absent)
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Status menu.
•
•
•
Power supply status (1)—Choose one of the following:
•
•
Press Enter to display the status of power supplies 0 and 1: OK, Fld, ABS.
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Status menu.
Power supply status (2)—Choose one of the following:
•
•
Press Enter to display the status of power supplies 2, 3, 4, and 5: OK, Fld, ABS.
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Status menu.
Environment status—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to display the status of the fan tray(s) and the chassis temperature:
•
Fan tray(s) status: OK, Fld, ABS
•
Chassis temperature status: OK, High, Shutdown
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Status menu.
•
•
Junos version status—Choose one of the following:
•
•
Press Enter to display the version of Junos OS for EX Series switches loaded on the switch.
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Status menu.
EXIT STAT MENU?—Choose one of the following:
•
•
Press Enter to exit the Status menu.
Press Menu to return to the Switch fabric status option.
If you do not want users to use Status menu options, disable the entire menu or individual menu options. See
Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).
20
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 7: LCD Panel Menu Options for the EX8200 Switch (continued)
Menu
Description
Maintenance
The Maintenance menu has the following options:
•
SYSTEM HALT?—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to halt the master SRE module in an EX8208 switch or to halt the master RE module in an
EX8216 switch. Press Enter again to confirm the halt.
In a base configuration switch, the master SRE or RE module will be gracefully halted but not powered
off. Press Enter on your management device or power cycle the switch to bring the switch back up.
In a redundant configuration, the backup SRE or RE module takes over mastership when the master SRE
or RE module is halted. To completely halt the switch, use the request system halt other-routing-engine
CLI command to halt the backup SRE or RE module before halting the master SRE or RE module. Press
Enter on your management device or power cycle the switch to bring the switch back up.
configuration types.
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
•
•
SYSTEM REBOOT?—Choose one of the following:
•
•
Press Enter to reboot the master SRE or RE module. Press Enter again to confirm the reboot.
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
LOAD RESCUE?—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to roll back the switch to the previous valid configuration. Press Enter again to confirm the
rollback.
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
•
•
FACTORY DEFAULT?—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to restore the switch to the factory default configuration. Press Enter again to confirm the
restoration. The LCD flashes a success or failure message and returns to the Idle menu.
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
ENTER EZSETUP?—Choose one of the following:
•
Press Enter to launch EZSetup. Press Enter again to confirm the launch.
EZSetup configures DHCP and enables the J-Web user interface on the switch. The LCD flashes a success
or failure message for approximately 10 seconds and returns to the Idle menu.
•
Press Menu to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu.
NOTE: You can use the EZSetup option only if the switch is in the factory default configuration.
EXIT MAINT MENU?—Choose one of the following:
•
•
•
Press Enter to exit the Maintenance menu.
Press Menu to return to the SYSTEM HALT option.
If you do not want users to use Maintenance menu options, disable the entire menu or individual menu options.
See Configuring the LCD Panel on EX Series Switches (CLI Procedure).
You can view the information about the LCD panel in EX8200 switches by executing the
command show chassis hardware. It shows the version, part number, serial number, and
description of the LCD panel.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX8216 Switch
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
Chassis Status LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
The top front of the chassis of an EX8200 switch has three LEDs on the right side of the
LCD panel.
Figure 6: Chassis Status LEDs
and states, and the status they indicate. You can view the colors of the three LEDs
remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis lcd.
Table 8: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
LED Label (Description)
Color
State and Description
ALM (Alarm)
Unlit
No alarm.
Red
Major alarm.
Yellow
Unlit
Minor alarm.
SYS (System)
Switch is powered off.
Yellow
One or more component failures are generating one or more
alarms.
Green
Unlit
Switch is operating normally.
Switch is powered off.
MST (Master)
Green
Master Routing Engine is operational.
A major alarm (red) indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action.
A minor alarm (yellow) indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or
maintenance. A minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or
performance degradation.
All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously.
22
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Related Topics
•
•
Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX8208 Switch
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are switch components that you can replace at your site.
The switch uses these types of FRUs:
•
Hot-insertable and hot-removable—You can remove and replace these components
without powering off the switch or disrupting the switching function.
•
Hot-pluggable—You can remove and replace these components without powering off
the switch, but the switching function is interrupted until you replace the component.
Table 9: FRUs in an EX8208 Switch
FRU
Type
Power supplies
Fan tray
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Redundant configuration:
module
•
Master SRE module is hot-pluggable.
•
Backup SRE module is hot-insertable and hot-removable.
Base configuration:
•
Redundant configuration:
Switch Fabric (SF) module
•
SF module is hot-insertable and hot-removable.
Base configuration:
•
We recommend that you disable the switch before removing the SF module. See
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.
8-port SFP+ line card
40-port SFP+ line card
48-port SFP line card
48-port RJ-45 line card
We recommend that you take the line cards offline before removing them. See
SFP and SFP+ transceivers
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: Line cards are not part of the base or redundant configuration. You must order
them separately.
NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or
upgrade of hardware components at
do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note applies
if you add a new type of line card. It does not apply if you replace these components
with the same type of component.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch
The Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module performs switching and system
You can install one or two SRE modules in an EX8208 switch. A base configuration
EX8208 switch has only one SRE module. See “EX8208 Switch Configurations” on
switch control redundancy. See “Understanding EX8208 Switch Component and
The SRE modules install horizontally into the front of the chassis in slots labeled SRE0
and SRE1.
24
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 7: SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch
NOTE: We recommend that you install two SRE modules for redundancy. If you install
only one SRE module, we recommend that you install it in slot SRE0. See “Slot
If two SRE modules are installed, one functions as the master and the other acts as the
backup. If the master SRE module fails or is removed, the backup takes over as the master.
If two SRE modules are installed, the backup SRE module is hot-insertable and
hot-removable, but the master SRE module is hot-pluggable. If only one SRE module is
installed, you must halt the SRE module before removing it.
The SRE module provides these functions:
•
Provides full fabric connectivity to all line cards installed in the chassis
•
Through the switching plane, provides switching functionality to the switch
•
Powers the line cards on and off
•
Controls system resets and boot sequence for the switch
•
Monitors and controls the fan speed, power status for various chassis components,
LCD panel and chassis status LEDs
The SRE module has these components:
•
SRE module LEDs—Indicate system status. See “SRE Module LEDs in an EX8208
•
Recessed reset button—Power cycles the SRE module when pressed.
•
USB port—Provides an interface through which you can install the Junos OS manually.
•
Auxiliary port—This port is not enabled on the EX8200 switch. It is reserved for future
use.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Console port—Connects the SRE module to a system console through a cable with an
RJ-45 connector. See “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console” on
•
Management port—Connects the SRE module through an Ethernet connection to a
management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection) for
out-of-band management. See “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for
•
•
Ejector levers—Used for installing and removing the SRE module.
Captive screws—Secure the SRE module in place.
Related Topics
•
•
•
SRE Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch
Each Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module has four LEDs on the left side of
LEDs, their colors and states, and the status they indicate.
Figure 8: SRE Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch
Table 10: SRE Module LEDs of an EX8208 Switch
LED Label (Description)
Color
Green
Unlit
State and Description
ON (Power On)
SRE module is powered on.
SRE module is powered off.
ST (Status)
Green
•
•
On steadily—SRE module is operating normally.
Blinking—SRE module is booting.
Yellow
Unlit
•
On steadily—SRE module has failed.
SRE module is offline.
26
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 10: SRE Module LEDs of an EX8208 Switch (continued)
LED Label (Description)
Color
State and Description
MS (Master)
Green
•
•
On steadily—SRE module is the master.
Blinking—SRE module is in standby mode.
Unlit
SRE module is powered off.
SF (Switch Fabric)
Green
•
•
On steadily—Switch fabric in the SRE module is operating
normally.
Blinking—Switch fabric in the SRE module is in standby mode.
Yellow
Unlit
Switch fabric in the SRE module has failed.
SRE module is powered off.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Management Port LEDs in EX8200 Switches
The management port on EX8200 switches has two LEDs that indicate link/activity and
the speed is set to 100 Mbps.
Figure 9: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX8200 Switch
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 11: Link/Activity LED on the Management Port on EX8200 Switches
LED
Color
State and Description
Link/Activity
Green
•
•
•
Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is link
activity.
On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no
link activity.
Off—The port is not active.
Table 12: Status LED on the Management Port on EX8200 Switches
LED
Color
State and Description
Status
Green
•
•
On steadily—Administrative status is enabled.
Off—Administrative status is disabled.
Related Topics
•
for port location.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
Switch Fabric (SF) Module in an EX8208 Switch
An EX8208 switch can have either zero SF modules or one SF module. The base
configuration of an EX8208 switch includes one SF module. See “EX8208 Switch
Figure 10: SF Module in an EX8208 Switch
The SF module can be installed only in the slot labeled SF. The SF module is keyed so
that it does not fit in the other slots in the chassis. See “Slot Numbering for an EX8208
28
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
In the base configuration, an SF module is used with a single Switch Fabric and Routing
Engine (SRE) module to build a nonredundant system that provides full bandwidth.
However, a base configuration EX8208 switch has no Routing Engine and switch control
redundancy or switch fabric redundancy. In a base configuration, the main function of
the SF module is to switch data between line cards. See “Understanding EX8208 Switch
In a redundant configuration, an SF module is used with two SRE modules to achieve
full bandwidth along with Routing Engine and switch control redundancy and switch
fabric redundancy. In a redundant configuration, the main function of the SF module is
to provide a redundant switching plane for the switch. See “Understanding EX8208
In a redundant configuration, the SF module is hot-pluggable. However, in the base
configuration, you must take the SF module offline before removing it.
The SF module contains logic that determines which SRE module is the master. The
master SRE module controls many internal functions of the SF module.
The SF module provides these functions:
•
Provide redundant data path connectivity for the switch in the redundant configuration
•
Provide nonredundant data path connectivity for the switch in the base configuration
The SF module has these components:
•
SF module LEDs—Indicate system status. See “SF Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch”
•
Ejector levers—Used for installing and removing the SF module.
•
Captive screws—Secure the SF module in place.
Related Topics
•
•
•
SF Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch
The Switch Fabric (SF) module has two LEDs on the left side of the module’s front panel.
and the status they indicate.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 11: SF Module LEDs in an EX8208 Switch
Table 13: SF Module LEDs of an EX8208 Switch
LED (Description)
Color
State and Description
ST (Status)
Green
•
•
On steadily—SF module is operating normally.
Blinking—Waiting to be configured by the master Switch Fabric
and Routing Engine (SRE) module.
Yellow
Unlit
SF module has failed.
SF module is offline.
SF (Switch Fabric)
Green
On steadily—Switch fabric in SF module is operating normally.
Blinking—Switch fabric in SF module is offline.
Yellow
Unlit
On steadily—Switch fabric in SF module has failed.
SF module is powered off.
Related Topics
•
•
•
8-port SFP+ Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards in EX8200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
EX8200 switches use four types of line cards:
•
8-port SFP+ line card
•
40-port SFP+ line card
30
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
•
•
48-port SFP line card
48-port RJ-45 line card
You can use any combination of line cards in an EX8200 switch.
10-gigabit SFP+ ports on the faceplate in which you can install SFP+ transceivers. The
line card is shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports. Each port has two LEDs.
Figure 12: 8-port SFP+ Line Card
The line card has two status LEDs labeled ON and ST on the faceplate that indicate the
online and status information for the line card. See “Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch”
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
40-port SFP+ Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards in EX8200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
EX8200 switches use four types of line cards:
•
8-port SFP+ line card
•
40-port SFP+ line card
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
48-port SFP line card
•
48-port RJ-45 line card
You can use any combination of line cards in an EX8200 switch.
oversubscribed 10-gigabit SFP+ ports on the faceplate in which you can install either
SFP+ or SFP transceivers. Each port has two LEDs. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX8200
The ports are divided into eight groups, each group comprising five ports (see Figure 14
on page 32). The ports in each port group share 10 gigabits of bandwidth.
Figure 13: 40-port SFP+ Line Card
Network ports
Line card LEDs
0
1
2
5
3
6
7
4
8
10
15
9
11
16
12
17
13
18
14
19
EX8200-40XS
20
25
21
26
22
27
23
28
24
29
30
35
31
36
32
37
33
38
34
39
Ejector lever
Ejector lever
Captive screw
Figure 14: Port Numbering and Port Groups on a 40-port SFP+ Line Card
Group 0
Group 2
Group 4
Group 6
Group 1
Group 3
Group 5
Group 7
The port groups can have different oversubscription ratios depending on the number of
active ports in each port group. If only one port in a port group is active, the
oversubscription ratio is 1:1. If two ports are active, the ratio is 2:1; if all ports are active,
the ratio is 5:1.
If you transmit 10 gigabits of traffic through a port group, the line card does not drop
packets. However, if you transmit more than 10 gigabits of traffic through a port group,
the line card allows only a fair share of traffic to transit. For example, if you transmit 10
gigabits of traffic though each of the five ports in a port group, the line card allows only
a fifth of the traffic from each port to transit. If you transmit 10 gigabits of traffic though
two ports in a port group, the line card allows only half the traffic from each port to transit.
Because the port groups share bandwidth, class-of-service (CoS) ingress and egress
queues are handled differently on the 40-port SFP+ line card than on other line cards
for EX8200 switches (see Understanding CoS Queues on the 40-port SFP+ Line Card
on EX8200 Switches). As a result, the ports in a port group must use the same scheduler
map. By default, they use the default scheduler map. To configure a different scheduler
map on the ports in a port group, see Defining CoS Schedulers (CLI Procedure).
32
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
The line card has two status LEDs labeled ON and ST on the faceplate that indicate the
online and status information for the line card. See “Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch”
The 40-port SFP+ line card requires Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or
later.
The line card is shipped with 40 dust covers (in an accessory bag).
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Troubleshooting CoS Schedulers on a 40-port SFP+ Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
48-port SFP Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards in EX8200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
EX8200 switches use four types of line cards:
•
8-port SFP+ line card
•
40-port SFP+ line card
•
48-port SFP line card
•
48-port RJ-45 line card
You can use any combination of line cards in an EX8200 switch.
SFP ports on the faceplate in which you can install SFP transceivers. The line card is
shipped with 48 dust covers (in the accessory bag). Each port has two LEDs. See “Network
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 15: 48-port SFP Line Card
SFP ports
Line card LEDs
Ejector levers
Captive screw
The line card has two status LEDs labeled ON and ST on the faceplate that indicate the
online and status information for the line card. See “Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch”
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
48-port RJ-45 Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards in EX8200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
EX8200 switches use four types of line cards:
•
8-port SFP+ line card
•
40-port SFP+ line card
•
48-port SFP line card
•
48-port RJ-45 line card
You can use any combination of line cards in an EX8200 switch.
10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports with RJ-45 connectors on the faceplate. Each port
34
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 16: 48-port RJ-45 Line Card
The line card has two status LEDs labeled ON and ST on the faceplate that indicate the
online and status information for the line card. See “Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch”
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Line Card LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards in EX8200 switches have two status LEDs labeled ON and ST on the
20 on page 36) that indicate the online and status information of the line cards.
Figure 17: Status LEDs on an 8-port SFP+ Line Card
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 18: Status LEDs on a 40-port SFP+ Line Card
Line
card
LEDs
SFP+/SFP ports
Captive screw
Ejector lever
Ejector lever
Figure 19: Status LEDs on a 48-port SFP Line Card
SFP ports
Captive
screw
Ejector lever
Line card
LEDs
Ejector lever
Figure 20: Status LEDs on a 48-port RJ-45 Line Card
colors and state, and the status they indicate.
Table 14: Status LEDs on Line Cards for EX8200 Switches
LED
Color
Green
Yellow
Unlit
State and Description
ON
The line card is enabled/online.
The line card is disabled/offline.
There is no power being supplied to the line card.
ST
Green
•
•
On steadily—The line card is functioning normally.
Blinking—The line card is booting.
Yellow
Unlit
•
•
On steadily—There is a line card failure or alarm.
Blinking—The line card is in diagnostic mode.
The line card is disabled/offline.
36
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Network Port LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
Each network port on the faceplate of a line card in an EX8200 switch has two LEDs.
Figure 21 on page 37 shows the network port LEDs on an 8-port SFP+ line card.
Figure 21: Network Port LEDs on an 8-port SFP+ Line Card
Figure 22 on page 37 shows the network port LEDs on a 40-port SFP+ line card. The LEDs
point toward the port to which the LEDs belong.
Figure 22: Network Port LEDs on a 40-port SFP+ Line Card
Link/Activity
lower port
Status
lower port
Link/Activity
upper port
Status
upper port
Figure 23 on page 38 shows the network port LEDs on a 48-port SFP line card. The LEDs
point toward the port to which the LEDs belong.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 23: Network Port LEDs on a 48-port SFP Line Card
Link/Activity
lower port
Status
lower port
Link/Activity
upper port
Status
upper port
Figure 24 on page 38 shows the network port LEDs on a 48-port RJ-45 line card.
Figure 24: Network Port LEDs on a 48-port RJ-45 Line Card
Table 15: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX8200 Switch—Link/Activity LED
LED
Color
State and Description
Link/Activity
Green
•
•
•
On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no
link activity.
Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is link
activity.
Off—The port is not active.
The port parameters are administrative status, duplex mode, and speed.
Enter button on the LCD panel to toggle between the ADM, DPX, and SPD indicators.
38
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 16: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX8200 Switch—Status LED
LED
LCD Indicator
State, Color, and Description
Status
LED: ADM
Indicates the administrative status (enabled or disabled). The
status indicators are:
•
•
Green—Administrative status enabled.
Unlit—Administrative status disabled.
LED: DPX
LED: SPD
Indicates the duplex mode. The status indicators are:
•
•
Green—Port is set to full-duplex mode.
Unlit—Port is not set to full-duplex mode.
Indicates the speed. The speed indicators are different in the
line cards.
The speed indicators for 8-port SFP+ line cards are:
•
•
Unlit—Less than 10 Gbps
Green—10 Gbps
The speed indicators for 40-port SFP+ line cards are:
•
•
Unlit—Less than 10 Gbps
Green—10 Gbps
The speed indicators for 48-port SFP line cards are:
•
•
Unlit—Less than 1 Gbps
Green—1 Gbps
The speed indicators for 48-port RJ-45 line cards are:
•
•
•
Unlit—10 Mbps
Green—Blinking—100 Mbps
Green—On steadily—1000 Mbps
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
EX8200 switches can use either AC or DC power supplies. This topic describes the AC
power supplies in EX8200 switches:
•
•
•
AC Power Supply Description
The AC power supplies in EX8200 switches are hot-insertable and hot-removable
field-replaceable units (FRUs).
You can install up to six AC power supplies in an EX8200 switch. Power supplies are
installed at the bottom of the chassis in slots PSU 0 through PSU 5 (left to right). All
power supplies are accessible from the front of the chassis.
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access
location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal provided on the chassis in addition
to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing terminal
must be permanently connected to earth ground.
NOTE: All base configuration EX8200 switches are shipped with two power supplies.
Cover panels are installed over the remaining four power supply slots. Additional power
supplies can be added to base configuration switches as necessary.
For details about different switch configurations, see “EX8208 Switch Configurations”
on page 6 or EX8216 Switch Configurations.
Each AC power supply weighs approximately 7 lb (3.2 kg) and has an independent 16 A
rated AC inlet on its front. Each inlet requires a dedicated AC power feed. Each AC power
supply has an Enable switch, a fan, and three LEDs on the faceplate that indicate the
40
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 25: AC Power Supply
Each AC power supply comes with a power retainer that holds the power cord in place.
L-shaped ends of the clip hook into the bracket holes on each side of the AC appliance
inlet on the faceplate. The adjustment nut holds the power cord in the correct position.
For instructions for installing the power retainer, see “Connecting AC Power to an EX8200
Figure 26: Power Retainer for an AC Power Supply
Each power supply connects to the backplane in an EX8208 switch and to the midplane
in an EX8216 switch. The backplane and the midplane distribute the output power
produced by the power supplies to different switch components. Each AC power supply
provides power to all the components in the switch.
Each power supply has its own fan and is cooled by its own internal cooling system. The
airflow is from the front of the power supply to the back. Hot air exhausts from the rear
of the chassis.
EX8200 switches support both 2000 W AC power supplies and 3000 W AC power
supplies.
The 2000 W AC power supply supports both the low-voltage line (100–120 VAC) and
the high-voltage line (200–240 VAC) AC power configurations. In both cases, the output
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
is 52 VDC. The output power is 1200 W for low-voltage line input and 2000 W for
high-voltage line input.
The 3000 W AC power supply supports only the high-voltage line input (200–240 VAC)
AC power configuration. Low-voltage line input is not supported for the 3000 W AC
power supplies on the EX8200 switches. The output is 52 VDC. The output power is
3000 W for high-voltage line input.
N+1 Redundancy Configuration of AC Power Supplies
N+1 redundancy configuration is required for normal operation of EX8200 switches. In
an N+1 redundancy configuration, if one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining
power supplies continue to supply power for the switch without interruption.
Depending on the configuration type of the switch and the input voltage, determine the
number of power supplies needed (N) for a switch. Install an additional power supply to
meet the required N+1 redundancy configuration. For details about different switch
Configurations.
The tables in this section list the N+1 power requirements for different EX8200 switch
configurations:
•
that use 2000 W AC power supplies.
•
that use 3000 W AC power supplies.
•
that use 2000 W AC power supplies.
•
that use 3000 W AC power supplies.
Table 17: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8208
Switch Configurations Using 2000 W AC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
3
4
6
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
2
3
5
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
42
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 18: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8208
Switch Configurations Using 3000 W AC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
3
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
2
Table 19: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8216
Switch Configurations Using 2000 W AC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
2
3
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
2
3
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
5
6
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
Not supported
Not supported
Table 20: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8216
Switch Configurations Using 3000 W AC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
5
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
4
N+N Redundancy Configuration of AC Power Supplies
You can optionally configure your switch for N+N redundancy, in which N power supplies
can be removed or fail and the remaining N power supplies continue to supply power for
the switch without interruption. A common application for N+N redundancy is to have a
dual power feed for AC power supplies.
How many power supplies you require for N+N redundancy can depend on which Junos
OS Release your switch is running:
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
multiple the N value by two.
NOTE: In Junos OS Release 10.1 or earlier, the power management feature manages
switches for N+1 redundancy only. This means, for example, that power management
raises an alarm if there is insufficient power to maintain N+1 redundancy, but not if there
is insufficient power to maintain N+N redundancy.
•
Starting with Junos OS Release 10.2, you can configure the power management software
to manage the switch power for N+N redundancy. When you configure power
management for N+N redundancy, power management lowers the maximum chassis
power consumption by lowering the maximum fan speed. It does so to compensate for
the extra power that is held in reserve in an N+N configuration than in an N+1 configuration,
because of which less power would ordinarily be available to power line cards. By reducing
the maximum chassis power consumption, power management allows the switch to
power more line cards.
The configuration type of the switch and the input voltage determine the number of
power supplies needed (N) for the switch. You must then install additional power supplies
to meet the N+N redundancy configuration. For details about different switch
Configurations.
The tables in this section list the N+N power requirements for different EX8200 switch
configurations:
•
configurations that use 2000 W AC power supplies.
•
configurations that use 3000 W AC power supplies.
•
configurations that use 2000 W AC power supplies.
•
configurations that use 3000 W AC power supplies.
44
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 21: N+N Power Supply Requirements for EX8208 Switch
Configurations Using 2000 W AC Power Supplies (Junos OS Release 10.2
or Later Only)
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+N
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
1
2
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
3
4
6
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
Not Supported
Table 22: N+N Power Supply Requirements for EX8208 Switch
Configurations Using 3000 W AC Power Supplies (Junos OS Release 10.2
or Later Only)
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+N
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
2
4
Table 23: N+N Power Supply Requirements for EX8216 Switch
Configurations Using 2000 W AC Power Supplies (Junos OS Release 10.2
or Later Only)
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+N
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
2
4
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
5
Not supported
Not supported
Low-voltage line
(100–120 VAC)
Not supported
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 24: N+N Power Supply Requirements for EX8216 Switch
Configurations Using 3000 W AC Power Supplies (Junos OS Release 10.2
or Later Only)
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+N
Input Voltage
Base
High-voltage line
(200–240 VAC)
1
2
Fully loaded with High-voltage line
8-port SFP+ line (200–240 VAC)
cards
3
6
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch
AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
An AC power supply has three LEDs on its faceplate. These LEDs display information
Figure 27: AC Power Supply LEDs on an EX8200 Switch
46
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 25: Power Supply LEDs on EX8200 Switches
LED
State
Description
Indicates one of the following:
INPUT OK
Unlit
•
•
Power supply is disconnected from AC power feed.
AC power input voltage is not within normal
operating range.
•
•
No AC power input.
Green
AC power input is high-voltage line (200–240 VAC).
Yellow
•
AC power input is low-voltage line (100–120 VAC).
NOTE: This LED state
applies only to 2000 W AC
power supplies.
OUTPUT OK
Unlit
Indicates one of the following:
•
•
•
DC output voltage is not within normal operating
range.
Power supply is not supplying DC power correctly.
Green
DC power output is within normal operating range.
Yellow
•
•
Power supply has been disabled internally by the
system.
FAIL
Unlit
Power supply is functioning normally.
Yellow
•
•
On steadily—Power supply has failed.
Blinking—Demand for output power exceeds the
supply.
NOTE: If the INPUT OK LED and the OUTPUT OK LED are unlit, the AC power cord is not
installed properly or the power supply has failed.
If the INPUT OK LED is lit and the OUTPUT OK LED is unlit, the AC power supply is not
installed properly or the power supply has an internal failure.
If the FAIL LED is lit, the power supply has failed and must be replaced. If the FAIL LED
is blinking, add a power supply to balance the power demand and supply.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Power Requirements for EX8216 Switch Components
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
The DC power supplies in EX8200 switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable units (FRUs).
NOTE: EX8208 switches support 2000 W DC power supplies.
EX8216 switches support 3000 W DC power supplies.
You can install up to six DC power supplies in an EX8200 switch. Power supplies are
installed at the bottom of the chassis in slots labeled PSU 0 through PSU 5 (left to right).
EX8216 Switch. All power supplies are accessible from the front of the chassis.
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access
location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal provided on the chassis. This
separate protective earthing terminal must be permanently connected to earth ground.
NOTE: EX8216 switches have two protective earthing terminals provided on the chassis,
one on the left side of the chassis and the other on the rear of the chassis. Only one of
these protective earthing terminals needs to be permanently connected to earth ground.
See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the location of the
protective earthing terminals.
NOTE: DC power supplies are shipped only in the redundant configuration of EX8200
switches.
switch configurations.
See EX8216 Switch Configurations for details about different EX8216 switch
configurations.
Each DC power supply weighs approximately 7 lb (3.2 kg) and has two independent pairs
of DC input lugs (A: –48V A: RTN and B: – 48V B: RTN ) on the front of the power supply.
Each power supply also has an Enable switch, a fan, and four LEDs on the faceplate that
48
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 28: DC Power Supply
NOTE: A 2000 W DC power supply requires a dedicated 60 A circuit breaker for each
input DC feed.
A 3000 W DC power supply requires a dedicated 100 A circuit breaker for each input
DC feed.
Each DC power supply connects to the backplane in an EX8208 switch and to the
midplane in an EX8216 switch. The backplane in an EX8208 switch and the midplane in
an EX8216 switch distribute the output power produced by the power supplies to different
switch components. Each DC power supply provides power to all the components in the
switch.
The output of each 2000 W DC power supply is 52 VDC. The output power is 2000 W.
The output of each 3000 W DC power supply is 52 VDC. The output power is 3000 W.
A DC power supply works with only one input DC feed connected. It is able to deliver the
full output power to all chassis components with only one DC feed connected.
Each DC power supply has its own fan and is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
The airflow is from the front of the power supply to the back. Hot air exhausts from the
rear of the chassis.
The minimum power configuration required by an EX8200 switch is an N+1 power
configuration. In an N+1 power configuration, if one power supply fails or is removed, the
remaining power supplies continue to supply power for the system without interruption.
The configuration type of the switch and the input voltage determine the number of
power supplies needed (N) for a switch. You must install an additional power supply to
meet the required N+1 power redundancy configuration. The DC power supplies each
provide independent A and B power feeds, so that dual power feed redundancy is available
about different EX8208 switch configurations. See EX8216 Switch Configurations for
details about different EX8216 switch configurations.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
The tables in this section list the N+1 power requirements of different EX8200 switch
configurations:
•
configurations that use 2000 W DC power supplies.
•
that use 3000 W DC power supplies.
Table 26: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8208
Switch Configurations Using 2000 W DC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
–40 VDC through
–72 VDC
1
2
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
–40 VDC through
–72 VDC
3
4
Table 27: N+1 Power Redundancy Configurations for Different EX8216
Switch Configurations Using 3000 W DC Power Supplies
Switch
Configuration
Power Supplies
Needed (N)
Power Supplies
Needed for N+1
Input Voltage
Base
–40 VDC through
–72 VDC
1
2
5
Fully loaded with
8-port SFP+ line
cards
–40 VDC through
–72 VDC
4
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch
DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
A DC power supply has four LEDs on its faceplate: FAIL, OUT OK, A IN OK, and B IN OK
LEDs. The text A or B next to the OK IN LEDs indicates which input lug the LED corresponds
to. All four LEDs display information about the status of the power supply. See Figure 29
50
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
NOTE: EX8208 switches support 2000 W DC power supplies.
EX8216 switches support 3000 W DC power supplies.
Figure 29: DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX8200 Switch
Table 28: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX8200 Switches
LED
State
Description
A IN OK
Unlit
Indicates one of the following:
•
•
Power supply is disconnected from DC power feed.
DC power input voltage is not within normal
operating range (-40 VDC through -72 VDC).
•
•
No DC power input.
Green
Yellow
Red
DC power input voltage is within normal operating
range (–40 VDC through –72 VDC).
•
•
DC input is present on the terminals but either the
fuse is tripped or the ORing diode is open.
DC power input voltage is reversed in polarity.
NOTE: The DC power supply is protected against
reverse polarity input for both DC input feeds.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 28: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX8200 Switches (continued)
LED
State
Description
B IN OK
Unlit
Indicates one of the following:
•
•
Power supply is disconnected from DC power feed.
DC power input voltage is not within normal
operating range (-40 VDC through -72 VDC).
•
•
No DC power input.
Green
Yellow
Red
DC power input voltage is within the normal
operating range (–40 VDC through –72 VDC).
•
DC input is present on the terminals but either the
fuse is tripped or the ORing diode is open.
•
DC power input voltage is reversed in polarity.
NOTE: The DC power supply is protected against
reverse polarity input for both DC input feeds.
OUT OK
Unlit
Indicates one of the following:
•
•
•
DC output voltage is not within normal operating
range.
Power supply is not supplying DC power correctly.
Green
DC power output is within normal operating range.
Yellow
•
•
Power supply has been disabled internally by the
system.
FAIL
Unlit
Power supply is functioning normally.
Yellow
•
•
On steadily—Power supply has failed.
Blinking—Demand for output power exceeds the
supply.
NOTE: If the IN OK LED and the OUT OK LED are unlit, the power cords are not installed
properly or the power supply has failed.
If the IN OK LED is lit green and the OUT OK LED is unlit, the power supply is not installed
properly or the power supply has an internal failure.
If the FAIL LED is lit, the power supply has failed and must be replaced. If the FAIL LED
is blinking, add a power supply to balance the power demand and supply.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Power Requirements for EX8216 Switch Components
52
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX8208 Switch
The cooling system in an EX8208 switch consists of a single fan tray. The fan tray is a
hot-insertable and hot-removable field-replaceable unit (FRU). The fan tray contains 12
fans.
The fan tray installs vertically on the left side on the front of the chassis and provides
side-to-side chassis cooling. A handle on the front faceplate facilitates handling of the
Figure 30: Fan Tray for an EX8208 Switch
The fan tray can be removed and replaced from the front of the chassis. The switch
continues to operate for a limited time (2 minutes) during the replacement of the fan
tray without thermal shutdown.
CAUTION: You must replace the fan tray within 2 minutes of removing it.
The air intake to cool the chassis is located on the right side of the chassis. Air is pulled
into the chassis and is pushed thorough the line card cage towards the fan tray. Hot air
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 31: Airflow Through the EX8208 Switch Chassis
The Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module monitors the temperature of switch
components. Under normal operating conditions, the fans in the fan tray run at less than
full speed. The fans are controlled by two fan tray controllers. The fans are numbered 1
through 12. Fans 1 through 6 are controlled by the first fan tray controller. Fans 7 through
12 are controlled by the second fan tray controller. If one fan tray controller fails, the other
fan tray controller keeps half the fans working. This allows the switch to continue to
operate normally as long as the remaining fans cool the chassis sufficiently.
If a fan fails or the ambient temperature rises above the threshold 113°F (45°C), the
speed of the remaining fans is automatically adjusted to keep the temperature within
the acceptable range, 32°F (0°C) through 104°F (40°C).
The fan tray continues to operate indefinitely and provide sufficient cooling even when
a single fan fails provided the room temperature is within the operating range. You can
check the status of fans and the chassis temperature from the Environment Status option
You cannot replace a single fan. If one or more fans fail, you must replace the entire fan
tray.
WARNING: There is no fan guard on the fans. Be careful to keep your fingers clear of
moving fan blades when you are removing the fan tray.
54
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Related Topics
•
•
•
Backplane in an EX8208 Switch
The backplane is a printed circuit board that forms the back of the line card cage. The
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) modules, Switch Fabric (SF) module, power
supplies, and line cards plug into the backplane from the front of the chassis. The
backplane contains an EEPROM that stores the serial number and revision level of the
backplane.
The backplane performs the following functions:
•
Power distribution—The backplane distributes power to all the switch components
from the power supplies that plug into it.
•
Control-signal connectivity—The backplane transports the control signals exchanged
by system components for monitoring, control, and management purposes.
•
Transfer of data between line cards and SRE modules—The backplane provides
connectivity for data traffic to and from the line cards and the SRE modules.
WARNING: High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the switch backplane.
Do not touch the backplane connectors, or any component connected to the backplane,
with any metallic object while servicing components installed in the switch.
Related Topics
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
56
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3
Component Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch
The following Juniper Networks USB flash drives have been tested and are officially
supported for the USB port on all EX Series switches:
•
RE-USB-1G-S
•
RE-USB-2G-S
•
RE-USB-4G-S
CAUTION: Any USB memory product not listed as supported for EX Series switches
has not been tested by Juniper Networks. The use of any unsupported USB memory
product could expose your EX Series switch to unpredictable behavior. Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) can provide only limited support for issues related
to unsupported hardware. We strongly recommend that you use only supported USB
flash drives.
All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features:
•
USB 2.0 or later.
•
Formatted with a FAT or MS-DOS file system.
•
If the switch is running Junos OS Release 9.5 or earlier, the formatting method must
use a master boot record. Windows formatting, by default, does not use a master boot
record. See the documentation for your USB flash drive for information on how your
USB flash drive is formatted.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location.
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for port location.
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch for port location.
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.
for port location.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
Booting an EX Series Switch Using a Software Package Stored on a USB Flash Drive
Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch
The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a console management device. The default baud rate for the
console port is 9600 baud.
An RJ-45 cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.
NOTE: If your laptop or PC does not have a DB-9 male connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the
RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter.
You must provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.
Table 29: EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information
Pin
Signal
Description
1
RTS Output
DTR Output
TxD Output
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
RxD Input
Request to send
Data terminal ready
Transmit data
Signal ground
Signal ground
Receive data
2
3
4
5
6
7
CD Input
Data carrier detect
Clear to send
8
CTS Input
Related Topics
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location.
58
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
•
•
•
•
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for port location.
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch for port location.
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for port location.
for port location.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX8200 Switch
The management port on an EX8200 switch uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to a
management device for out-of-band management.
The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100/1000Base-T
connection. Two LEDs on the port indicate link/activity on the port and the administrative
cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.
Table 30: Management Port Connector Pinout Information for EX8200 Switches
Pin
Signal
TRP1+
TRP1-
Description
1
Transmit/receive data pair 1
Transmit/receive data pair 1
Transmit/receive data pair 2
Transmit/receive data pair 3
Transmit/receive data pair 3
Transmit/receive data pair 2
Transmit/receive data pair 4
Transmit/receive data pair 4
2
3
TRP2+
TRP3+
TRP3-
TRP2-
TRP4+
TRP4-
4
5
6
7
8
Related Topics
•
for port location.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches
This topic describes the optical interfaces supported for transceivers used in the SFP
and SFP+ line cards for EX8200 switches. It also lists the copper interface supported for
the SFP transceivers.
NOTE: Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper
Networks for your EX Series switch.
The Gigabit Ethernet SFP and SFP+ transceivers installed in EX8200 switches support
digital optical monitoring (DOM): you can view the diagnostic details for these transceivers
by issuing the operational mode CLI command show interfaces diagnostics optics. The
command does not give any output for copper transceivers, Fast Ethernet transceivers,
or transceivers not purchased from Juniper Networks.
The tables in this topic describe the optical interface support over single-mode fiber-optic
(SMF) and multimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables for SFP and SFP+ transceivers and over
the copper interface for SFP transceivers:
•
line cards
•
line cards
•
line cards
•
transceivers in 48-port SFP line cards
60
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 31: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 8-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-SR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-USR
10 Gbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Fiber Count
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–7.3 dBm
–1.3 dBm
–11.1 dBm
–9.9 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
62.5/125
µm
50/125
µm
50/125µm
OM3
Fiber Grade
OM1
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
200
500
1500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
10 m
30 m
100 m
(32.8 ft)
(98.4 ft)
(328 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.2 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 31: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 8-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-SR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-SR
10 Gbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–7.3 dBm
–1 dBm
–9.9 dBm
–1 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
62.5/125
µm
62.5/125
µm
50/125µm 50/125
µm
50/125
µm
Fiber Grade
FDDI
OM1
–
OM2
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
160
200
400
500
1500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
26 m
33 m
66 m
82 m
300 m
(85 ft)
(108 ft)
(216 ft)
(269 ft)
(984 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
62
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 31: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 8-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-LRM
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-LRM
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
LC
Fiber Count
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–6.5 dBm
0.5 dBm
–21 dBm
0.5 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
Fiber Grade
62.5/125µm 50/125µm 50/125µm
FDDI/OM1
OM2
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
500
500
500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
220 m
220 m
220 m
(722 ft)
(722 ft)
(722 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.5 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
63
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 31: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 8-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-LR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-LR
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
LC
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–8.2 dBm
0.5 dBm
–18 dBm
0.5 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
10 km (6.2 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
64
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 31: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 8-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-ER
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-ER
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1550 nm
–4.7 dBm
4 dBm
–11.3 dBm
–1 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
40 km (24.8 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.1 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 32: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-T
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-T
Rate
10/100/1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
RJ-45
–
–
–
–
–
Copper
Core Size
–
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
100 m (328 ft)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
66
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 32: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-SX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-SX
1000 Mbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–9.5 dBm
–3 dBm
–21 dBm
0 dBm
MMF
Core Size
62.5 µm
160 MHz/km
62.5 µm
50 µm
50 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
200 MHz/km
400 MHz/km
500 MHz/km
220 m (721 ft) 275 m
(902 ft)
500 m
(1640 ft)
550 m
(1804 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 32: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-LX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-LX
Rate
1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
LC
1310 nm
–9.5 dBm
–3 dBm
–25 dBm
–3 dBm
SMF
Core Size
9 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
10 km (6.2 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
68
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 32: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-LH (or
1000Base-ZX)
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-LH
Rate
1000 Mbps
Connector Type
LC
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1550 nm
–2 dBm
5 dBm
–25 dBm
–3 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
10 µm
–
70 km (43.5 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
69
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 33: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-SR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-USR
10 Gbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Fiber Count
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–7.3 dBm
–1.3 dBm
–11.1 dBm
–9.9 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
62.5/125
µm
50/125
µm
50/125µm
OM3
Fiber Grade
OM1
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
200
500
1500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
10 m
30 m
100 m
(32.8 ft)
(98.4 ft)
(328 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
70
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 33: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-SR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-SR
10 Gbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–7.3 dBm
–1 dBm
–9.9 dBm
–1 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
62.5/125
µm
62.5/125
µm
50/125µm 50/125
µm
50/125
µm
Fiber Grade
FDDI
OM1
–
OM2
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
160
200
400
500
1500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
26 m
33 m
66 m
82 m
300 m
(85 ft)
(108 ft)
(216 ft)
(269 ft)
(984 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 33: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-LRM
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-LRM
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
LC
Fiber Count
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–6.5 dBm
0.5 dBm
–21 dBm
0.5 dBm
MMF
Core/Cladding Size
Fiber Grade
62.5/125µm 50/125µm 50/125µm
FDDI/OM1
OM2
OM3
Modal Bandwidth
500
500
500
MHz/km
MHz/km
MHz/km
Distance
220 m
220 m
220 m
(722 ft)
(722 ft)
(722 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
72
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 33: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-LR
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-LR
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
LC
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–8.2 dBm
0.5 dBm
–18 dBm
0.5 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
10 km (6.2 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 33: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in 40-port SFP+ Line Cards Used in
EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
10GBase-ER
Model Number
EX-SFP-10GE-ER
Rate
10 Gbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1550 nm
–4.7 dBm
4 dBm
–11.3 dBm
–1 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
40 km (24.8 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.3 or later
74
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-T
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-T
Rate
10/100/1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
RJ-45
–
–
–
–
–
Copper
Core Size
–
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
100 m (328 ft)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-SX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-SX
1000 Mbps
LC
Rate
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
850 nm
–9.5 dBm
–3 dBm
–21 dBm
0 dBm
MMF
Core Size
62.5 µm
160 MHz/km
62.5 µm
50 µm
50 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
200 MHz/km
400 MHz/km
500 MHz/km
220 m (721 ft) 275 m
(902 ft)
500 m
(1640 ft)
550 m
(1804 ft)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
76
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
100Base-FX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1FE-FX
Rate
100 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
LC
1310 nm
–20 dBm
–14 dBm
–32.5 dBm
–8 dBm
MMF
Core Size
62.5 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
2 km (1.2 miles)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-LX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-LX
Rate
1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
LC
1310 nm
–9.5 dBm
–3 dBm
–25 dBm
–3 dBm
SMF
Core Size
9 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
10 km (6.2 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
78
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
100Base-LX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1FE-LX
Rate
100 Mbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–15 dBm
–8 dBm
–31.5 dBm
–8 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
10 km (6.2 miles)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.2 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-LX
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-LX40K
Rate
1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–14 dBm
–8 dBm
–45 dBm
–3 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
40 km (24.8 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.6 or later
80
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
100Base-LX40K
Model Number
EX-SFP-1FE-LX40K
Rate
100 Mbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–5 dBm
0 dBm
–32 dBm
–8 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
40 km (24.8 miles)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.2 or later
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
1000Base-LH (also
called 1000Base-ZX)
Model Number
EX-SFP-1GE-LH
Rate
1000 Mbps
Connector Type
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
LC
1550 nm
–2 dBm
5 dBm
–25 dBm
–3 dBm
SMF
Core Size
10 µm
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
–
70 km (43.5 miles)
DOM Support
Available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 9.4 or later
82
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 34: Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for SFP Transceivers in
48-port SFP Line Cards Used in EX8200 Switches (continued)
Ethernet Standard
Specifications
100Base-LH (or
100Base-ZX)
Model Number
EX-SFP-1FE-LH
Rate
100 Mbps
Connector Type
Fiber Count
LC
Dual
Transmitter Wavelength
Minimum Launch Power
Maximum Launch Power
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Maximum Input Power
Fiber Type
1310 nm
–5 dBm
0 dBm
–32 dBm
–8 dBm
SMF
Core/Cladding Size
Modal Bandwidth
Distance
9/125 µm
–
80 km (49.7 miles)
DOM Support
Not available
Software required
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 10.2 or later
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
SFP+ Direct Attach Cables for EX Series Switches
Small form-factor pluggable plus transceiver (SFP+) direct attach copper cables, also
known as Twinax cables, are suitable for in-rack connections between servers and
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
switches. They are suitable for short distances up to 7 m, making them ideal for highly
cost-effective networking connectivity within a rack and between adjacent racks.
This topic describes:
•
•
Cable Specifications
Juniper Networks SFP+ direct attach cables are available in four lengths:
•
1 m (3.3 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
•
3 m (9.9 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
•
5 m (16.4 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, and EX8200 switches
•
7 m (23 ft)—Supported on EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, and EX8200 switches
NOTE: When you use SFP+ direct attach cables with your EX Series switches, we
recommend that you use only Juniper Networks SFP+ direct attach cables.
The cables are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them
without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. A cable comprises a
low-voltage cable assembly that connects directly into two SFP+ modules, one at each
end of the cable. The cables use high-performance integrated duplex serial data links
for bidirectional communication and are designed for data rates up to 10 Gbps.
84
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 35: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications
Model
Specification
EX-SFP-10GE-DAC-1m
Rate
10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmission
Connector type
SFP+ passive Twinax cable assembly
Supply voltage
3.3 V
Power consumption (per end)
Storage temperature
Cable type
0.57 W
-40°C to 85°C
Twinax
Wire AWG
30 AWG
Minimum cable bend radius
Cable characteristic impedance
Crosstalk between pairs
Time delay
1 in.
100 ohms
2% maximum
1.31 nsec/ft
Length
1 m (3.3 ft)
EX-SFP-10GE-DAC-3m
Rate
10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmission
Connector type
SFP+ passive Twinax cable assembly
Supply voltage
3.3 V
Power consumption (per end)
Storage temperature
Cable type
0.57 W
-40°C to 85°C
Twinax
Wire AWG
30 AWG
1 in.
Minimum cable bend radius
Cable characteristic impedance
Crosstalk between pairs
Time delay
100 ohms
2% maximum
1.31 nsec/ft
3 m (9.9 ft)
Length
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 35: SFP+ Direct Attach Cable Specifications (continued)
Model
Specification
EX-SFP-10GE-DAC-5m
Rate
10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmission
Connector type
SFP+ passive Twinax cable assembly
Supply voltage
3.3 V
Power consumption (per end)
Storage temperature
Cable type
0.57 W
-40°C to 85°C
Twinax
Wire AWG
24 AWG
Minimum cable bend radius
Cable characteristic impedance
Crosstalk between pairs
Time delay
2 in.
100 ohms
2% maximum
1.31 nsec/ft
Length
5 m (16.4 ft)
EX-SFP-10GE-DAC-7m
Rate
10 Gbps full-duplex serial transmission
Connector type
SFP+ passive Twinax cable assembly
Supply voltage
3.3 V
Power consumption (per end)
Storage temperature
Cable type
0.57 W
-40°C to 85°C
Twinax
Wire AWG
24 AWG
Minimum cable bend radius
Cable characteristic impedance
Crosstalk between pairs
Time delay
2 in.
100 ohms
2% maximum
1.31 nsec/ft
7 m (23 ft)
Length
86
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Standards Supported by These Cables
The cables comply with the following standards:
•
•
•
SFP+ Multi-Source Alliance (MSA) standards
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX8200 Switches
For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, the switch
must be adequately grounded before power is connected to ensure proper operation
and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements. To ground an
EX8200 switch, connect a grounding cable to earth ground and then attach it to the
chassis grounding points.
CAUTION: For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis,
use the protective earthing terminal on the EX8200 switch chassis to connect to earth
ground. Before switch installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug
to the grounding cables that you supply. See “Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series
Switch” on page 167. A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch.
A pair of threaded inserts (PEM nuts) is provided on the right side towards the top rear
corner of the EX8208 chassis for connecting the switch to earth ground. The grounding
points fit UNC ¼-20 screws. The grounding points are spaced at 0.625 in. (15.86 mm).
Two pairs of threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the EX8216 chassis for
connecting the switch to earth ground. The first pair is located on the right side towards
the top rear corner of the chassis. The second pair is on the rear of chassis towards the
right bottom corner of the chassis. Both pairs of grounding points fit UNC ¼-20 screws.
The grounding points are spaced at 0.625 in. (15.86 mm).
NOTE: EX8216 switches have two protective earthing terminals provided on the chassis.
Only one of these protective earthing terminals needs to be permanently connected to
earth ground. See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the location
of the protective earthing terminals.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: Grounding is provided to an AC-powered switch when you plug its power supplies
into grounded AC power receptacles.
Figure 32 on page 88 shows the cable lug that attaches to the grounding cable in an
EX8208 switch.
Figure 32: Grounding Cable Lug For an EX8208 Switch
The grounding cable that you provide for an EX8208 switch must be 6 AWG (13.3 mm2),
minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
The grounding cable that you provide for an EX8216 switch must be 2 AWG (33.6 mm2),
minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
NOTE: Two grounding lugs for an EX8216 switch are shipped with the chassis.
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access
location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal provided on the chassis in addition
to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing terminal
must be permanently connected to earth ground for installations that require a separate
grounding conductor to the chassis.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
88
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
90
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4
Site Preparation
•
•
•
•
Site Preparation Checklist for an EX8200 Switch
a site for installing an EX8200 switch.
Table 36: Site Preparation Checklist
Item or Task
For More Information
Performed By
Date
Environment
Verify that environmental factors such as
tolerances.
Power
Measure distance between external power
sources and switch installation site.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 36: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)
Item or Task
For More Information
Performed By
Date
Calculate the power consumption and
requirements.
Power Requirements for EX8216
Switch Components
Calculating Power Requirements for
an EX8216 Switch
Rack or Cabinet
it meets the minimum requirements for the
installation of the switch.
Rack Requirements for an EX8216
Switch
Cabinet Requirements and
Specifications for an EX8216 Switch
Plan rack or cabinet location, ensuring the
required space clearances.
Clearance Requirements for Airflow
and Hardware Maintenance for an
EX8216 Switch
92
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
Table 36: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)
Item or Task
For More Information
Performed By
Date
Secure the rack or cabinet to the floor and
building structure.
Rack Requirements for an EX8216
Switch
Cabinet Requirements and
Specifications for an EX8216 Switch
Cables
Plan the cable routing and management.
Acquire cables and connectors:
•
•
Determine the number of cables needed
based on your planned configuration.
Ensure that the distance between hardware
components to be connected allows for
cable lengths to be within the specified
maximum limits.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches
Efficient switch operation requires proper site planning and maintenance and proper
layout of the equipment, rack or cabinet (if used), and wiring closet.
To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your EX Series switch and
prevent environmentally caused equipment failures:
•
Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as
metal flakes.
•
Follow prescribed airflow guidelines to ensure that the cooling system functions properly
and that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
switch.
•
Follow the prescribed ESD prevention procedures to avoid damaging the equipment.
Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time.
•
Install the switch in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the
switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Related Topics
•
•
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches
•
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4500 Switches
•
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8216 Switch
Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches
wiring at your site.
WARNING: It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded
environment and to use electrical surge-suppression devices.
Table 37: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines
Site Wiring Factor
Guidelines
Signaling limitations
If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult
experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding:
•
•
•
Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference
(RFI).
Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed
recommended distances or pass between buildings.
Electromagnetic pulses (EMPs) caused by lightning
damages unshielded conductors and electronic devices.
Radio frequency interference
To reduce or eliminate radio frequency interference (RFI) from
your site wiring, do the following:
•
•
Use twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding
conductors.
If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a
high-quality twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor
for each data signal when applicable.
94
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
Table 37: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines (continued)
Site Wiring Factor
Guidelines
Electromagnetic compatibility
If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC), particularly from lightning or radio
transmitters, seek expert advice.
Some of the problems caused by strong sources of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) are:
•
•
Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the switch
Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted
over the lines into the equipment
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power Supply in EX2200 Switches
Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
AC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches
Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches
The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated,
and temperature-controlled environment.
Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed:
•
The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and
filters, reducing the efficiency of the switch cooling system.
•
Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or
restricted, or if the intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the
switch temperature monitor shutting down the switch to protect the hardware
components.
operation.
Table 38: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances
Description
Tolerance
Altitude
No performance degradation to 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 38: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (continued)
Description
Tolerance
Relative humidity
Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 10% through
85%, noncondensing
Temperature
•
•
EX2200, EX3200, EX4200, and EX4500 switches: Normal
operation ensured in temperature range of 32° F through 113° F
(0° C through 45° C)
EX8208 and EX8216 switches: Normal operation ensured in
temperature range of 32° F through 104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Seismic
Complies with Zone 4 earthquake requirements as per GR-63, Issue
3.
NOTE: Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment
rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110–16, 110–17, and 110–18
of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Related Topics
•
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and
EX4200 Switches
•
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4500 Switches
•
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8216 Switch
96
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5
Rack and Cabinet Requirements
•
•
•
Rack Requirements for an EX8208 Switch
Rack requirements consist of:
•
Rack type
•
Mounting bracket hole spacing
•
Rack size and strength
•
Rack connection to the building structure
switches.
two-post rack installation.
NOTE: To manage airflow in a hot-aisle-cold-aisle data center setup, you might want
to use the customized rack solution for EX8200 switches offered by Chatsworth
Products, Inc.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 39: Rack Requirements and Specifications for an EX8208 Switch
Rack Requirement
Guidelines
Rack type and mounting bracket hole
spacing
Use a four-post rack or a two-post rack. You can mount the switch on any four-post
or two-post rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1 U (1.75
in./4.44 cm) increments and that meets the size and strength requirements specified
in this table.
A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated
Equipment (document number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry
You can stack three EX8208 switches in a four-post rack that has at least 42 U; if you
install the optional power cord tray, a minimum of 45 U are required. You can stack
three EX8208 switches in a two-post rack that has 45 U (installing the power cord
tray is mandatory for two-post rack installations). In all cases, the rack must meet the
strength requirements to support the weight.
Rack size and strength
•
•
Ensure that the rack is a 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and
Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics
Ensure that the rack is one of the following standard lengths:
•
•
•
23.62 in. (600 mm)
30.0 in. (762 mm)
21.5 in. (546 mm)
•
Ensure that the rack rails are spaced widely enough to accommodate the EX8208
switch chassis' external dimensions of 24.25 in. (61.6 cm) height, 17.25 in. (43.815
cm) width, 20 in. (50.8 cm) depth. The outer edges of the front-mounting brackets
extend the width to 19 in. (48.3 cm).
•
•
The EX8208 switch chassis height of 24.25 in. (61.6 cm) is approximately 14 U. If
you install the power cord tray (optional for four-post rack installations, mandatory
for two-post rack installations), the chassis and power cord tray consume 15 U.
The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured switch.
A fully configured EX8208 switch weighs up to 284 lb (130 kg). If you stack three
fully configured EX8208 switches in one rack, that rack must support up to 852 lb
(487 kg).
•
Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows for the proper clearance
around the switch and rack as specified in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and
Rack connection to the building
structure
•
•
Secure the rack to the building structure.
If earthquakes are a possibility in your geographical area, secure the rack to the
floor.
•
Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum
stability.
98
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for an EX8208 Switch
You can mount an EX8208 switch on a cabinet that contains a 19-in. rack as defined in
Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D)
Cabinet requirements consist of:
•
Cabinet size and clearance
•
Cabinet airflow requirements
switches.
Table 40: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for an EX8208 Switch
Cabinet Requirement
Guidelines for the EX8208 Switch
Cabinet size and clearance
•
The minimum cabinet size for accommodating an EX8208
switch is 23.62 in. (60 cm) wide and 30.0 in. (76.2 cm) deep.
Large cabinets improve airflow and reduce the chance of
overheating. To accommodate a single EX8208 switch in
a four-post rack, the cabinet must be at least 14 U high (or
15 U if you install the power cord tray, which is optional for
the four-post rack). To accommodate a single EX8208
switch in a two-post rack, the cabinet must be at least 15
U high.
A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks,
Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number
EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry
•
With adequate cooling air and airflow clearance, you can
stack three EX8208 switches in a cabinet with a four-post
rack that has at least 42 U of usable vertical space. (45 U
are required if you install the optional power cord tray.) You
can stack three EX8208 switches in a cabinet with a
two-post rack that has at least 45 U of usable vertical space
(for two-post rack installations, installing the power cord
tray is mandatory). In all cases, the rack must meet the
strength requirements to support the weight.
•
The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 29.2 in.
(74.17 cm) between the inside of the front door and the
inside of the rear door.
100
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Rack and Cabinet Requirements
Table 40: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for an EX8208 Switch (continued)
Cabinet Requirement
Guidelines for the EX8208 Switch
Cabinet airflow requirements
When you mount the switch on a cabinet, ensure that
ventilation through the cabinet is sufficient to prevent
overheating. Consider the following requirements list when
planning for chassis cooling:
•
Ensure that the cool air supply you provide through the
cabinet adequately dissipates the thermal output of the
switch (or switches).
•
Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust air
to exit the cabinet without recirculating into the switch. An
open cabinet (without a top or doors) that employs hot air
exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow
through the chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors,
perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot
air exhaust. For an illustration of chassis airflow, see
•
The switch fans exhaust hot air through the right side of the
chassis (the left side when you face the front of the chassis,
where the fan tray slides in). Install the switch in the cabinet
in a way that maximizes the open space on the fan tray side
of the chassis. This maximizes the clearance for critical
airflow.
•
•
Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of
airflow to and from the chassis.
Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows
for the proper clearance around the switch and rack as
specified in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and
Related Topics
•
•
•
Clearance Requirementsfor Airflowand Hardware Maintenance for anEX8208Switch
When planning the site for installing an EX8208 switch, you must allow sufficient
clearance around the switch.
NOTE: To manage airflow in a hot-aisle--cold-aisle data center setup, you might want
to use the customized rack solution for EX8200 switches offered by Chatsworth
Products, Inc.
•
Allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance on each side of the chassis. For the cooling
system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted. See
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 35: Airflow Through the EX8208 Switch Chassis
•
•
If you are mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet along with other equipment, ensure
that the exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
chassis.
Leave at least 24 in. (61 cm) both in front of and behind the switch. Allow at least 6 in.
(15.2 cm) of clearance on each side of the chassis. Leave adequate space at the front
of the switch for service personnel to remove and install hardware components. NEBS
GR-63 recommends that you allow at least 30 in. (76.2 cm) in front of the rack or
102
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
104
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6
Cable Requirements
•
•
Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices
and Routing Engine (SRE) module (in an EX8208 switch) or the Routing Engine (RE)
module (in an EX8216 switch) to a management device.
Table 41: Cable Specifications for Switch-to-Management-Device
Connections
Port on SRE
Module or RE
Module
Cable
Specification
Cable/Wire
Supplied
Maximum
Length
Switch
Receptacle
Console (CON)
port (9600 baud)
RS-232 (EIA-232)
serial cable
One 6-foot
6 feet
(1.83 meters)
RJ-45
(1.83-meter) length
with RJ-45/DB-9
connectors
Management
(MGMT) Ethernet
port
Category 5 cable
or equivalent
suitable for
One 15-foot
(4.57-meter) length
with RJ-45
328 feet
(100 meters)
RJ-45
autosensing
(10/100/1000)
1000Base-T
operation
connectors
Related Topics
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Understanding EX8200 Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and
Dispersion
To determine the power budget and power margin needed for fiber-optic connections,
you need to understand how signal loss, attenuation, and dispersion affect transmission.
Juniper Networks EX8200 Ethernet Switches use various types of network cable, including
multimode and single-mode fiber-optic cable.
•
•
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable
Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally
(bounce off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs
as light sources. However, LEDs are not coherent light sources. They spray varying
wavelengths of light into the multimode fiber, which reflects the light at different angles.
Light rays travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber, causing signal dispersion.
When light traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber cladding (layers of lower
refractive index material in close contact with a core material of higher refractive index),
higher-order mode loss (HOL) occurs. Together, these factors reduce the transmission
distance of multimode fiber compared to that of single-mode fiber.
Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light reflect internally through one
layer only. Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers generate
a single wavelength of light, which travels in a straight line through the single-mode fiber.
Compared to multimode fiber, single-mode fiber has a higher bandwidth and can carry
signals for longer distances. It is consequently more expensive.
For information about the maximum transmission distance and supported wavelength
range for the types of single-mode and multimode fiber-optic cables that are connected
to line cards on the EX8200 switches, see “Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches”
on page 60. Exceeding the maximum transmission distances can result in significant
signal loss, which causes unreliable transmission.
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable
An optical data link functions correctly provided that modulated light reaching the receiver
has enough power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the reduction in strength
of the light signal during transmission. Passive media components such as cables, cable
splices, and connectors cause attenuation. Although attenuation is significantly lower
for optical fiber than for other media, it still occurs in both multimode and single-mode
transmission. An efficient optical data link must transmit enough light to overcome
attenuation.
Dispersion is the spreading of the signal over time. The following two types of dispersion
can affect signal transmission through an optical data link:
•
Chromatic dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the
different speeds of light rays.
106
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Cable Requirements
•
Modal dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the different
propagation modes in the fiber.
For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic dispersion or
attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length. For single-mode
transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However, at higher bit rates and over longer
distances, chromatic dispersion limits the maximum link length.
An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that
the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion
must be within the limits specified for the type of link in Telcordia Technologies document
GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
document G.957.
When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered as
a power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum
of component attenuation, power penalties (including those from dispersion), and a
safety margin for unexpected losses.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
108
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 7
Planning Power Requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Power Specifications for EX8200 Switches
EX8200 switches can use either AC or DC power supplies.
in EX8200 switches.
Table 42: Power Specifications for a 2000 W AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
Item
Specifications
AC input voltage
Operating range:
•
•
Low-voltage line—100–120 VAC
High-voltage line—200–240 VAC
AC input line frequency
AC input current rating
50–60 Hz
•
•
Low-voltage line—13.8 A
High-voltage line—12 A
AC output power
•
•
Low-voltage line—1200 W
High-voltage line—2000 W
in EX8200 switches.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 43: Power Specifications for a 3000 W AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
Item
Specifications
AC input voltage
Operating range:
•
High-voltage line—200–240 VAC
NOTE: Low-voltage line input is not supported for 3000 W AC power supplies
on the EX8216 switch.
AC input line frequency
AC input current rating
AC output power
50–60 Hz
•
•
High-voltage line—16 A
High-voltage line—3000 W
Related Topics
•
•
•
DC Power Specifications for EX8200 Switches
in EX8216 switches.
Table 44: Power Specifications for a 3000 W DC Power Supply Used in an EX8216 Switch
Item
Specifications
DC input voltage
•
•
•
Minimum operating voltage: –40 VDC
Nominal operating voltage: –48 VDC
Operating voltage range: –40 VDC through –72 VDC
NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below –37.5 VDC through –39.5
VDC, the switching platform automatically shuts down. During automatic shutdown, the
circuit remains active. When the input voltage returns to –43 VDC through –44 VDC, the
switch automatically starts up again and the system returns to normal operation within 30
minutes. No operator intervention is required.
DC input current rating
Output power
75 A maximum at nominal operating voltage (–48 VDC) for each input terminal.
3000 W
100 A
Internal Fuse Protection
in EX8208 switches.
110
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
Table 45: Power Specifications for a 2000 W DC Power Supply Used in an EX8208 Switch
Item
Specifications
DC input voltage
•
•
•
Minimum operating voltage: –40 VDC
Nominal operating voltage: –48 VDC
Operating voltage range: –40 VDC through –72 VDC
NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below –37.5 VDC through –39.5
VDC, the switching platform automatically shuts down. During automatic shutdown, the
circuit remains active. When the input voltage returns to –43 VDC through –44 VDC, the
switch automatically starts up again and the system returns to normal operation within 30
minutes. No operator intervention is required.
DC input current rating
Output power
50 A maximum at nominal operating voltage (–48 VDC) for each input terminal.
2000 W
100 A
Internal Fuse Protection
Related Topics
•
•
Power Requirements for EX8208 Switch Components
of an EX8208 switch under typical voltage conditions.
Table 46: EX8208 Switch Component Power Requirements
Components
Power Requirements (Watts)
Fan tray
•
•
300 W (at normal fan speed)
1100 W (at maximum fan speed)
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module
Switch Fabric (SF) module
200 W
100 W
450 W
550 W
330 W
350 W
8-port SFP+ line card (including optical transceivers)
40-port SFP+ line card (including optical transceivers)
48-port SFP line card (including optical transceivers)
48-port RJ-45 line card
Related Topics
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that
requires a dedicated AC power feed. Most sites distribute power through a main conduit
that leads to frame-mounted power distribution panels, one of which can be located at
the top of the rack that houses the switch. An AC power cord connects each power supply
to the power distribution panel.
Each detachable AC power cord is 2.5 meters (approximately 8 feet) long. The appliance
coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into the AC appliance inlet on the faceplate
of the AC power supply. The coupler type is C19 as described by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug at the male end of the
power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for your geographical location.
NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters (approximately
15 feet) in length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA
75, 5-2.2) and 210-52 and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). The cords
shipped with the switch are in compliance.
countries and regions listed in the table.
Table 47: AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch
Country/Region
Electrical Specifications
250 VAC, 15 A, 50 Hz
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
Plug Standards
AS/NZS 3112
GB 1002
Australia
China
Europe (except Italy,
Switzerland, and United
Kingdom)
CEE (7) VII
Italy
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
CEI 23-16
Japan
NEMA 6–20
NEMA L6–20
112
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
Table 47: AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch (continued)
Country/Region
Electrical Specifications
Plug Standards
North America
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
•
•
NEMA 6–20
NEMA L6–20
125 VAC, 15 A, 50 Hz
125 VAC, 20 A, 50 Hz
•
NEMA 5–15
NOTE: Only for use with 2000 W AC power
supply.
•
NEMA 5–20
NOTE: Only for use with 2000 W AC power
supply.
Switzerland
250 VAC, 16 A, 50 Hz
250 VAC, 13 A, 50 Hz
SEV 1011 SEV 5934/2
BS 1363/A
United Kingdom
Figure 37 on page 113 shows the plug on the power cord for each country and region listed
Figure 37: AC Plug Types
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: AC power cords for EX8200 switches are intended for use with this switch
only and not for any other use.
Power Cable Warning (Japanese)
WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.
CAUTION: Power cords must not block access to switch components. We recommend
that you route all AC power cord cables through the power cord tray provided with the
switch.
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in a restricted-access
location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal provided on the chassis in addition
to the grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earth terminal
must be permanently connected to earth ground. See “Connecting Earth Ground to an
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8208 Switch
Use the information in this topic to calculate power consumption, system thermal output,
and number of power supplies required for different EX8208 switch configurations.
Before you begin these calculations:
•
Ensure you understand the different switch configurations. See “EX8208 Switch
•
Ensure that you know the power requirements of different switch components. See
114
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
This topic describes these tasks:
•
•
•
Calculating the Power Consumption of Your EX8208 Switch Configuration
Use the following procedure to determine the maximum power you need to supply to
the switch. To calculate maximum system power consumption, you first determine the
combined maximum internal power requirements of all the switch components and then
divide this result by the power supply efficiency.
To calculate maximum system power consumption:
1.
Determine the maximum power consumption of the base chassis components (that
is, the components other than the line cards):
•
if your switch is configured for N+N power redundancy and is running Junos OS
Release 10.1 or earlier.
•
later and power management is configured for N+N power redundancy.
NOTE: In Junos OS Release 10.2 or later, if power management is configured for N+N
redundancy, the maximum fan speed is lowered, reducing the chassis’ maximum power
consumption.
Table 48: Chassis Power Consumption for N+1 Configurations and for
N+N Configurations Running Junos OS Release 10.1 or Earlier
Chassis Component
Base Configuration
RedundantConfiguration
Fan tray
1100 W
1100 W
200 W
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) 200 W
module
Second SRE module
Switch Fabric module
Total
—
200 W
100 W
100 W
1400 W
1600 W
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 49: Chassis Power Consumption for N+N Configurations Running
Junos OS Release 10.2 or Later
Chassis Component
Base Configuration
Redundant Configuration
Fan tray
700 W
200 W
—
700 W
200 W
200 W
100 W
1200 W
SRE module
SRE module
SF module
Total
100 W
1000 W
2. Calculate the maximum internal power consumption of the entire switch by adding
in the power requirements of each line card.
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using N+1
power redundancy, the maximum internal power consumption:
= (chassis watts) + 8 (8-port SFP+ line card watts)
= (1600 W + 8 (450 W))
= (1600 W + 3600 W)
= 5200 W
3. Calculate the maximum system power consumption by dividing the maximum
internal power consumption by the efficiency of the power supply. This accounts for
the loss of energy within the power supply.
NOTE: The efficiency of a 2000 W AC power supply is approximately 90 percent when
input is high-voltage line (200–240 VAC).
The efficiency of a 2000 W AC power supply is approximately 87 percent when input
is low-voltage line (100–120 VAC).
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using N+1
power redundancy with high-voltage line input, the maximum system power
consumption:
= (maximum internal power consumption) / (power supply efficiency)
= (5200 W) / (0.90)
= 5778 W
Calculating System Thermal Output for Your EX8208 Switch Configuration
Use the following procedure to calculate the system thermal output in British thermal
units (BTU) per hour for your switch configuration.
116
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
To calculate the system thermal output:
1.
Determine the maximum system power consumption of your switch in watts. See
page 115 for how to do so.
2. Multiply the maximum system power consumption by 3.41.
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using N+1
power redundancy with high-voltage line input, the system thermal output:
= (maximum system power consumption) x (3.41)
= (5778 W) x (3.41) =
= 19,703 BTU/hr
NOTE: Using the maximum system power consumption values to calculate the system
thermal output often results in overprovisioning the cooling systems. Typical power
consumption is about one-third lower than these calculated values.
Calculating the Number of Power Supplies Required for Your EX8208 Switch Configuration
Use this procedure to calculate the number of power supplies required by your switch
configuration. The required power configuration for EX8208 switches is N+1. You can
optionally configure your switch for N+N configuration. For example, you might want
dual power feed redundancy with AC power supplies, which requires an N+N configuration.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
To calculate the number of power supplies required for your switch configuration:
1.
Determine the power requirement of the base chassis (that is, the combined power
requirements of the fan tray, SRE module or modules, and the SF module) by
by power management for the chassis in its power budget. It uses these values when
calculating used and available power and when determining whether sufficient
power exists to meet N, N+1, or N+N requirements.
Starting with Junos OS Release 10.2, when power management is configured for
N+N power redundancy, it reserves less power for the chassis so that more power
is available for line cards.
Table 50: Power Reserved for the Chassis
Junos OS Release 10.1 or
Earlier
Junos OS Release 10.2 or
Later
N+1 Configuration
N+N Configuration
1600 W
1600 W
1600 W
1200 W
NOTE: The amount of power that power management reserves for the chassis is a set
value that does not vary depending on chassis components installed. The reserved
power is the same for base and redundant configurations and for switches that do not
have all base chassis components installed.
2. To the power reserved for the chassis, add the power requirements of the line cards.
For line card power requirements, refer to “Power Requirements for EX8208 Switch
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using N+1
power redundancy, the total power requirement:
= reserved chassis power + 8 (8–port SFP + line cards)
= 1600 W + 8 (450) W
= 1600 W + 3600 W
= 5200 W
For a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards, using N+N power redundancy,
and running Junos OS Release 10.2, the total power requirement:
= reserved chassis power + 8 (8–port SFP + line cards)
= 1200 W + 8 (450) W
= 1200 W + 3600 W
= 4800 W
118
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
3. Calculate the number of power supplies (N) required to meet the total power
requirement by dividing the total power requirement by the output wattage of one
power supply and then rounding up.
NOTE: If the input is high-voltage line (200–220 VAC), the output wattage of a 2000
W AC power supply is 2000 W.
If the input is low-voltage line (100–120 VAC), the output wattage of a 2000 W AC
power supply is 1200 W.
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using N+1
power redundancy with high-voltage line input , the required power supplies (N):
= (total power requirement) / (output wattage of power supply)
= (5200 W) / (2000 W)
= 2.6
= 3 (rounded up)
For a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards, using N+N power redundancy
with high-voltage line input, and running Junos OS Release 10.2, the required power
supplies (N):
= (total power requirement) / (output wattage of power supply)
= (4800 W) / (2000 W)
= 2.4
= 3 (rounded up)
4. Add the number of power supplies needed to achieve the required power redundancy:
•
To achieve N+1 power redundancy, add a single power supply.
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using
high-voltage line input, the total number of power supplies:
= N + 1
= 3 + 1
= 4
•
To achieve N+N power redundancy, add N power supplies.
For example, for a switch fully loaded with 8-port SFP+ line cards and using
high-voltage line input, the total number of power supplies:
= N + N
= 3 + 3
= 6
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: We recommend that you maintain N +1 or N+N power supplies in your switch
at all times. Replace failed power supplies immediately to prevent unexpected failures.
Power management raises a minor alarm if the number of online power supplies in your
switch is less than the number required to maintain the configured power redundancy
(N+1 in Junos OS Release 10.1 or earlier; N+1 or N+N in Junos OS Release 10.2 or later).
If the problem is not corrected in 5 minutes, a major alarm is issued.
Power management raises a major alarm if the number of online power supplies in your
switch is less than N power supplies. If your switch is running Junos OS Release 10.1 or
earlier, all line cards are powered off. If your switch is running Junos OS Release 10.2 or
later, power management provides power to line cards in priority order until power is
exhausted. The remaining line cards are powered off.
If a new line card is installed in an operational switch, power management does not
power on the line card if the increased power demand exceeds the total available power,
including redundant power. If redundant power is used to power on the line card, a minor
alarm is raised, which becomes a major alarm in 5 minutes if the condition is not
corrected.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Understanding Power Management on EX Series Switches
Calculating the EX8200 Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget
Calculate the link's power budget when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation. The
power budget is the maximum amount of power the link can transmit. When you calculate
the power budget, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even though
all the parts of an actual system do not operate at the worst-case levels.
To calculate the worst-case estimate for fiber-optic cable power budget (P ) for the
B
link:
1.
Determine values for the link's minimum transmitter power (P ) and minimum
T
receiver sensitivity (P ). For example, here, (P ) and (P ) are measured in decibels,
R
T
R
and decibels are referred to one milliwatt (dBm).
P
P
= –15 dBm
= –28 dBm
T
R
NOTE: See the specifications for your transmitter and receiver to find the minimum
transmitter power and minimum receiver sensitivity.
120
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
2. Calculate the power budget (P ) by subtracting (P ) from (P ):
B
R
T
–15 dBm – (–28 dBm) = 13 dBm
Related Topics
•
•
•
Calculating the EX8200 Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin
Calculate the link's power margin when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient signal power to overcome system
losses and still satisfy the minimum input requirements of the receiver for the required
performance level. The power margin (P ) is the amount of power available after
M
attenuation or link loss (LL) has been subtracted from the power budget (P ).
B
When you calculate the power margin, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin
of error, even though all the parts of an actual system do not operate at worst-case
levels. A power margin (P ) greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient
M
to operate the receiver and that it does not exceed the maximum receiver input power.
This means the link will work. A (P ) that is zero or negative indicates insufficient power
M
to operate the receiver. See the specification for your receiver to find the maximum
receiver input power.
Before you begin to calculate the power margin:
•
Calculate the power budget. See “Calculating the EX8200 Switch Fiber-Optic Cable
To calculate the worst-case estimate for the power margin (P ) for the link:
M
1.
Determine the maximum value for link loss (LL) by adding estimated values for
applicable link-loss factors—for example, use the sample values for various factors
the (P ) is 13 dBm):
B
Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss
Link-Loss Factor
Estimated Link-Loss Value
Sample (LL) Calculation Values
Higher-order mode losses (HOL)
•
•
Multimode—0.5 dBm
Single mode—None
•
•
0.5 dBm
0 dBm
Modal and chromatic dispersion
•
•
Multimode—None, if product of
bandwidth and distance is less than
500 MHz/km
•
•
0 dBm
0 dBm
Single mode—None
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss (continued)
Link-Loss Factor
Estimated Link-Loss Value
Sample (LL) Calculation Values
Connector
0.5 dBm
This example assumes 5 connectors.
Loss for 5 connectors:
5(0.5 dBm) = 2.5 dBm
Splice
0.5 dBm
This example assumes 2 splices. Loss for
two splices:
2(0.5 dBm) = 1dBm
Fiber attenuation
•
•
Multimode—1 dBm/km
This example assumes the link is 2 km
long. Fiber attenuation for 2 km:
Single mode—0.5 dBm/km
•
•
2 km(1.0 dBm/km) = 2 dBm
2 km( 0.5 dBm/km) = 1 dBm
Clock Recovery Module (CRM)
1 dBm
1 dBm
NOTE: For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment
and other factors, see your vendor documentation for that equipment.
2. Calculate the (P ) by subtracting (LL) from (P ):
M
B
P – LL = P
B
M
13 dBm – 0.5 dBm [HOL] – 5 (0.5 dBm) – 2 (0.5 dBm) – 2 km (1.0 dBm/km) – 1 dB
[CRM] = P
M
13 dBm – 0.5 dBm – 2.5 dBm – 1 dBm – 2 dBm – 1 dBm = P
M
P = 6 dBm
M
The calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the link has sufficient
power for transmission. Also, the power margin value does not exceed the maximum
receiver input power. Refer to the specification for your receiver to find the maximum
receiver input power.
Related Topics
•
•
•
122
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
124
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 8
Installing the Switch
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch
The EX8208 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the other hardware
components such as Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) modules, a Switch Fabric
(SF) module, and line cards. The switch ships in a cardbox box that has a two-layer
wooden pallet base. The switch chassis is bolted to the pallet base.
You can install an EX8208 switch in a 19-in. equipment rack or cabinet by using the
front-mounting bracket attached to the chassis. To install the switch in a rack or cabinet,
follow the instructions in “Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Using a
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
To connect the switch to a network for out-of-band management, follow instructions in
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Unpacking an EX8200 Switch
After you prepare the installation site as described in “Site Preparation Checklist for an
EX8200 Switch” on page 91, you may unpack the switch.
NOTE: The switch is maximally protected inside the shipping box. Do not unpack it until
you are ready to begin installation.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to unpack the EX8200
switch:
•
A 7/16-in. or 11-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove the bracket bolts from the
shipping pallet
•
A box cutter or packing knife to slice open the tape that seals the top of the box
The switch ships in a cardboard box that has a two-layer wooden pallet base with foam
cushioning between the layers. The switch chassis is bolted to the pallet base.
The EX8208 chassis ships with the Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module(s),
Switch Fabric (SF) module, fan tray, and power supplies for the configuration you ordered
already installed. Any line cards ordered ship separately.
The EX8216 chassis ships with the Routing Engine (RE) module(s), SF modules, fan trays,
and power supplies for the configuration you ordered already installed. Any line cards
ordered ship separately.
information about base configurations and redundant configurations.
126
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
1.
Move the shipping box to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible.
For an EX8208 switch, make sure there is enough space to remove components
from the chassis if necessary (for example, if you do not have a mechanical lift to
use when you install the switch). While the chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can
use a forklift or pallet jack to move it.
2. Position the shipping box with the arrows pointing up.
3. Open the four pallet fasteners near the bottom of the shipping box that attach the
cardboard box to the wooden pallet. To open a pallet fastener, squeeze together
the two ridges (“fins”) in the depression in the latch, then slide the pallet fastener
Figure 38: Pallet Fastener
4. Carefully slice open the tape that holds the top of the cardboard box closed and
open the top of the box.
5. Remove the cardboard accessory box from the center of the foam padding.
6. Remove the foam padding from the top of the box.
7.
Slide the cardboard box off the pallet.
8. Remove the plastic cover from the switch chassis.
9. Use a 7/16-in. or 11-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove the four sets of bracket
bolts that secure the chassis to the shipping pallet.
10. Unpack the accessory box and lay out the contents so that they are ready for use.
List) for an EX8208 Switch” on page 130 and Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an
EX8216 Switch.
12. Store the brackets and bolts inside the accessory box.
13. Save the shipping box, pallet, and packing materials in case you need to move or
ship the switch at a later time.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX8208 Switch
The switch shipment includes a packing list. Check the parts you receive in the switch
shipping crate against the items on the packing list. The packing list specifies the part
number and description of each part in your order. The parts shipped depend on the
information.
If any part on the packing list is missing, contact your customer service representative or
contact Juniper customer care from within the U.S. or Canada by telephone at
1–800–638–8296. For international-dial or direct-dial options in countries without
NOTE: All line cards ordered are shipped separately. Line cards are not listed on the
switch’s packing list.
NOTE: The base configuration is available only with AC power supplies. The redundant
configuration ships with either AC or DC power supplies.
configuration and a redundant configuration switch.
Table 52: Parts List for Different EX8208 Switch Configurations
Component
Base Configuration Quantity
Redundant Configuration Quantity
Chassis, including the backplane and
front-mounting brackets
1
1
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE)
module
1
2
Switch Fabric (SF) module
Power supplies
1
1
2 AC
6 AC or 4 DC
Power supply cords
Fan tray
2 (1 per power supply)
1
6 (1 per AC power supply)
1
Cover panels for slots without installed
components
•
•
•
Line card cover panels: 8
SRE module cover panel: 1
Power supply cover panels: 4
•
Line card cover panels: 8
ship with both configurations of the switch.
130
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Table 53: Accessory Box Parts List
Component
Quantity
Label, accessories contents
1
1
1
1
1
2
Accessory kit box
Quick Start installation instructions
Left front adjustable mounting bracket
Right front adjustable mounting bracket
Rear adjustable mounting brackets
Screws to connect the front pieces and rear pieces of the adjustable mounting brackets for four-post rack
installation.
12
Each bracket consists of a front piece and a rear piece. Six screws connect the front-and-rear pieces of each
of the two adjustable mounting brackets.
Power cord tray
1
Velcro tie-wraps for power cord tray
12
6
1
Power cord retainers
Juniper Networks Product Warranty
End User License Agreement
1
Juniper Compliance Form Letter, RoHS Worldwide
Ethernet cable, RJ-45/RJ-45, 4-pair stranded UTP, category #5
RJ-45 to female DB-9 cable, to connect to the switch's console port using a management PC's serial port
ESD grounding strap
1
1
1
1
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: You must provide mounting screws that are appropriate for your rack to
front-mount the chassis on a rack or a cabinet.
For two-post rack installation, you need 28 screws: 24 screws to attach the
front-mounting bracket “ears” that come installed on the chassis to the front of the
rack and 4 screws to install the power cord tray. (The power cord tray is mandatory for
two-post rack installation.)
For four-post rack installation, you need either 40 or 44 screws: 24 screws to attach
the front-mounting bracket “ears” that come installed on the chassis to the front of the
rack, 16 screws to attach the adjustable mounting brackets to the rack, and 4 screws
if you install the optional power cord tray.
Related Topics
•
•
Installing Adjustable Mounting Brackets in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX8200 Switch
To mount the switch on a four-post rack or cabinet, you must first install the adjustable
mounting brackets in the rack or cabinet. (The remainder of this topic uses “rack” to mean
“rack or cabinet.”) The EX8200 switch comes with a four-piece set of adjustable mounting
brackets that supports the chassis in the rack.
NOTE: The adjustable mounting brackets are not for installation in two-post racks.
The four adjustable mounting bracket pieces are:
•
1 left front adjustable mounting bracket. The bracket is labeled “LEFT FRONT” on the
side of the bracket that faces the interior of the rack, near the holes for attaching the
bracket to the rack.
•
1 right front adjustable mounting bracket. The bracket is labeled “RIGHT FRONT” on
the side of the bracket that faces the interior of the rack, near the holes for attaching
the bracket to the rack.
•
2 rear adjustable mounting brackets. These brackets are labeled “REAR” on the side
of the bracket that faces the interior of the rack, near the holes for attaching the bracket
to the rack. The rear brackets are interchangeable; you can use either of the rear brackets
with the right or left front adjustable mounting bracket.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the adjustable
mounting brackets:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1, 2, or 3, depending on the size of your rack mounting
screws
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 to install the screws that connect the rear and
front mounting brackets
132
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
•
16 mounting screws appropriate for your rack to attach the four mounting bracket
pieces to the rack
When you install the adjustable mounting brackets, the “arms” of the brackets overlap.
The overlap area adjusts the total bracket length to fit three standard rack sizes: 23.62
in. (600 mm), 30 in. (762 mm), and 31.5 in. (800 mm).
1.
Remove the adjustable mounting brackets from the accessory box.
2. Decide where to position the switch in the rack. If the rack is empty, position the
switch in the lowest possible location. See “Rack Requirements for an EX8208
and Specifications for an EX8208 Switch” on page 100, and Cabinet Requirements
and Specifications for an EX8216 Switch.
3. Position the left front adjustable mounting bracket at the desired position in the left
side of the rack and line up its front screw holes with the holes in the rack. Use 4
mounting screws appropriate for your rack to attach the left front bracket to the
rack.
4. Position one of the rear brackets at the left rear of the rack on the same level as the
left front bracket, so that the rear bracket overlaps with the left front bracket. The
screw holes for connecting the front and rear brackets should overlap. Use 4 mounting
screws appropriate for your rack to attach the rear bracket to the rack.
a. Insert 6 of the screws provided with the mounting brackets into the overlapping
bracket holes.
b. Hand tighten the screws fully (to 12–16 in.-lb torque) using a number 2 Phillips
screwdriver.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 41: Adjustable Mounting Brackets for Four-Post Rack Installation
6. Position the right front adjustable mounting bracket at the desired position in the
right side of the rack opposite the installed left front bracket, so that it is on the same
rack level as the left bracket. If the right and left front brackets are not on the same
level, the chassis will rest at an angle in the rack instead of resting flat and level. Line
up the right bracket's front screw holes with the holes in the rack. Use 4 mounting
screws appropriate for your rack to attach the right front bracket to the rack.
7.
Position the other rear bracket at the right rear of the rack on the same level as the
right front bracket, so that the rear bracket overlaps with the right front bracket. The
screw holes for connecting the front and rear brackets should overlap. Use 4 mounting
screws appropriate for your rack to attach the rear bracket to the rack.
a. Insert 6 of the screws provided with the mounting brackets into the overlapping
bracket holes.
b. Hand tighten the screws fully (to 12–16 in.-lb torque) using a number 2 Phillips
screwdriver.
134
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Figure 42: Adjustable Mounting Brackets Installed in a Four-Post Rack
(EX8208 Switch)
Figure 43: Adjustable Mounting Brackets Installed in a Four-Post Rack
(EX8216 Switch)
Related Topics
•
•
•
Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
Installing the Power Cord Tray in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX8200 Switch
The power cord tray is supplied with all EX8200 switches. The power cord tray is optional
for four-post rack or cabinet installation but mandatory for a two-post rack or cabinet
installation. (The remainder of this topic uses “rack” to mean “rack or cabinet.”) To mount
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
an EX8208 switch in a two-post rack, you must install the power cord tray in the rack
before installing the switch.
NOTE: The EX8216 switch can be installed only in a four-post rack. Installation in a
two-post rack is not supported.
The power cord tray provides support for the front of the EX8208 chassis during
installation of the switch in a two-post rack. The front edge of the chassis rests on the
upper edge (lip) of the power cord tray.
The power cord tray provides a place to organize and tie down the power cords for the
power supplies.
The power cord tray uses 1 U of rack space, so the total space occupied by an EX8208
switch chassis and power cord tray is 15 U, and the total space occupied by an EX8216
switch chassis and power cord tray is 22 U.
Ensure that you have the following tools and parts available to install the power cord
tray:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1, 2, or 3, depending on the size of your rack mounting
screws
•
4 mounting screws appropriate for your rack to attach the power cord tray to the rack
1.
Remove the power cord tray from the accessory box.
2. Decide where to position the switch in the rack. If the rack is empty, choose the lowest
Requirements for an EX8216 Switch, “Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for
an EX8208 Switch” on page 100 and Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for
an EX8216 Switch.
NOTE: To mount an EX8208 switch on a two-post rack, you must install the power
of an EX8216 switch in a two-post rack is not supported.
3. Position the power cord tray in the rack space immediately below the position in
which you want to install the switch (in a two-post rack) or where the switch is
of the power cord tray with the holes in the rack. Use 4 mounting screws appropriate
for your rack to attach the power cord tray to the rack.
136
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Figure 44: Installing the Power Cord Tray in a Four-Post Rack
Figure 45: Power Cord Tray Installed in a Two-Post Rack
Related Topics
•
•
Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
The EX8208 switch ships installed with front-mounting brackets on the chassis for
mounting the switch on a 19-in. equipment rack or cabinet. The switch also comes with
adjustable mounting brackets to support it in the rack.
In a four-post rack, the switch consumes 14 U without the optional power cord tray and
15 U with the optional power cord tray. In a two-post rack, the power cord tray is
mandatory. The switch with the power cord tray consumes 15 U. You can mount up to
three switches on a 42 U four-post rack or on a 45 U two-post rack provided that the
racks meet the strength requirements to support the combined weight of the switches.
NOTE: If you are mounting multiple switches on a rack or cabinet, mount a switch on
the bottom of the rack or cabinet first and then mount the rest of the switches from
bottom to top.
WARNING: If you install the switch without using a mechanical lift, at least three people
must be available to lift the unloaded switch chassis (all components except the
backplane removed) onto the adjustable mounting brackets (in a four-post rack or
cabinet) or onto the lip of the power cord tray (in a two-post rack or cabinet).
CAUTION: Do not install line cards in the chassis until after you mount the chassis
securely on a rack or cabinet.
Before mounting an EX8208 switch on a rack or cabinet:
•
Verify that the site meets the requirements described in “Site Preparation Checklist
•
Place the rack or cabinet in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for
airflow and maintenance, and secure it to the building structure. See “Clearance
for detailed information.
•
•
Remove the switch from the shipping box (see “Unpacking an EX8200 Switch” on
page 126).
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to mount the switch on a
rack or cabinet:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws, for mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet
138
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
•
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1, to remove the power supplies from the chassis if
you are mounting the switch without using a mechanical lift
24 mounting screws appropriate for your rack
1.
In a four-post rack or cabinet, install the adjustable mounting brackets at the desired
In a two-post rack or cabinet, install the power cord tray (see “Installing the Power
Cord Tray in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX8200 Switch” on page 135). The power cord
tray is optional for four-post rack installation.
2. Lift the chassis into the rack using a mechanical lift. For instructions on how to install
the chassis using a mechanical lift, see “Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or
In a four-post rack, place the chassis on the adjustable mounting brackets. In a
two-post rack, place the front edge of the chassis on the lip of the power cord tray
with at least three people supporting the rear of the chassis until you can bolt the
chassis into the rack.
If a mechanical lift is not available, remove all components and ensure that at least
three people are available to lift the empty chassis into the rack. For instructions on
how to install the chassis without using a mechanical lift, see “Mounting an EX8208
3. Insert 24 mounting screws appropriate for your rack (not provided) into the aligned
holes. Use the appropriate Phillips (+) screwdriver to tighten the screws to the rack
or cabinet rail.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 46: Installing an EX8208 Switch in a Two-Post Rack
Figure 47: Installing an EX8208 Switch in a Four-Post Rack
Related Topics
•
•
•
140
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Using a Mechanical Lift
Because of the switch's size and weight, we strongly recommend using a mechanical lift
to install the switch.
NOTE: For instructions on installing a switch without using a mechanical lift, see
CAUTION: Do not install line cards in the chassis until after you mount the chassis
securely on a rack or cabinet.
CAUTION: Before front-mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet, have a qualified
technician verify that the rack or cabinet is strong enough to support the switch's weight
and is adequately supported at the installation site.
Before you install the switch:
•
Prepare the site for installation as described in “Site Preparation Checklist for an
•
Ensure the site has adequate clearance for both airflow and hardware maintenance
as described in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
•
•
In a two-post rack, install the power cord tray at the desired position (see “Installing
of the power cord tray will support the front of the chassis when you install the switch
in the two-post rack.
•
In a four-post rack, install the adjustable mounting brackets at the desired position
Switch” on page 132). Optionally, you can also install the power cord tray and use it to
manage the power supply cords.
•
Review chassis lifting guidelines described in “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX8200
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the switch:
•
A mechanical lift
•
24 mounting screws appropriate for your rack
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one switch in a rack or cabinet, install the first
switch at the bottom of the rack.
1.
Ensure that the rack or cabinet is placed in its permanent location and is secured to
the building. Ensure that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both
airflow and maintenance. For details, see “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and
2. Load the switch onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform.
Figure 48: Installing the EX8208 Switch Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift
3. Using the lift, position the switch in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front
of the adjustable mounting brackets and/or power cord tray installed in the rack.
4. Lift the chassis approximately 0.75 in. (1.9 cm) above the surface of the adjustable
mounting brackets/power cord tray. Position the chassis in the rack as close as
possible to resting on the support that the mounting brackets and/or power cord
tray provide.
5. In a four-post rack, carefully slide the switch onto the adjustable mounting brackets
until the front-mounting brackets (“ears”) attached to the chassis contact the rack
142
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
rails. The adjustable mounting brackets installed in the rack ensure that the holes
in the front-mounting brackets align with the holes in the rack rails.
In a two-post rack, carefully slide the switch into the rack ensuring that the front
bottom of the chassis rests on the lip of the power cord tray. The front-mounting
brackets (“ears”) prevent the chassis from tipping too far back.
6. Move the lift away from the rack.
7.
In a four-post rack, slide the chassis so that the front-mounting bracket is flush with
the front of the rack.
In a two-post rack, push the bottom of the chassis so that the front-mounting bracket
is flush with the front of the rack.
8. Install a mounting screw into each of the open front-mounting holes aligned with
the rack, starting from the bottom.
9. Visually inspect the alignment of the switch. If the switch is installed properly in the
rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting
screws on the opposite side and the switch is level.
10. After ensuring that the switch is aligned properly, tighten the screws.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical Lift
If you cannot use a mechanical lift to install the switch (the preferred method), you can
install it manually.
CAUTION: The chassis with only the backplane and no other components weighs
approximately 89 lb (41 kg). Lifting the chassis and mounting it in a rack or cabinet
requires at least three people.
The chassis has two handles. Do not lift a fully loaded chassis by the handles; make
sure the chassis is empty (contains only the backplane) before you lift it. If two of the
people lifting the chassis use the handles to lift it, the third person must lift from the
rear of the chassis. The rear of the chassis is heavier than the front of the chassis, so
when you lift the chassis by the handles, the chassis tips toward the heavier back end.
The person lifting from the back must be aware of this behavior and must be braced to
prevent the chassis from tipping over.
When lifting the chassis, do not grasp the switch by the blue panel at the top front of
the chassis. Doing so can cause the panel to pop off of the switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: Before front-mounting the switch in a rack, have a qualified technician verify
that the rack is strong enough to support the switch's weight and is adequately
supported at the installation site.
Before you install the switch:
1.
Prepare the site for installation as described in “Site Preparation Checklist for an
2. Ensure the site has adequate clearance for both airflow and hardware maintenance
as described in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
4. Remove all components except the backplane from the chassis. See:
•
•
•
•
•
lip of the power cord tray will support the front of the chassis when you install the
switch in the rack.
In a four-post rack, install the adjustable mounting brackets at the desired position
Switch” on page 132). Optionally, you can also install the power cord tray and use it
to manage the power supply cords.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the switch:
•
24 mounting screws appropriate for your rack
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws
144
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
page 147):
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one switch in a rack or cabinet, install the first
one at the bottom of the rack. Do not attempt to install a switch manually in an upper
position in a rack or cabinet.
1.
Ensure that the rack or cabinet is placed in its permanent location and is secured to
the building.
2. Position the switch in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of the adjustable
mounting brackets. Use a pallet jack if one is available.
3. With one person on each side and one person in the rear, hold the bottom of the
chassis and carefully lift it onto the adjustable mounting brackets installed in a
four-post rack or onto the power cord tray installed in a two-post rack. See Figure
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your
back. Do not twist your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your
footing is firm.
Figure 49: Lifting an EX8208 Switch Chassis Without Using a Mechanical
Lift
4. In a four-post rack, carefully slide the switch onto the adjustable mounting brackets
until the front-mounting brackets attached to the chassis contact the rack rails. The
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
adjustable mounting brackets ensure that the holes in the front-mounting brackets
attached to the chassis align with the holes in the rack rails.
In a two-post rack, carefully slide the switch over the lip of the power cord tray and
into the rack. Push the bottom of the chassis so that the front-mounting bracket is
flush with the front of the rack.
5. Install a mounting screw into each of the open front-mounting holes aligned with
the rack, starting from the bottom.
6. Visually inspect the alignment of the chassis. If the chassis is installed properly in
the rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting
screws on the opposite side and the switch is level.
7.
After ensuring that the switch is aligned properly, tighten the screws.
Figure 50: Installing an EX8208 Switch in a Four-Post Rack
146
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Figure 51: Installing an EX8208 Switch in a Two-Post Rack
After you install the mounting screws and securely bolt the chassis to the rack, reinstall
the components in the chassis. See:
•
•
•
•
•
Related Topics
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
148
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 9
Installing Switch Components
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing and Removing EX8208 Switch Hardware Components
The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in an EX8208 switch are:
•
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module
•
Switch Fabric (SF) module
•
8-port SFP+ line card
•
40-port SFP+ line card
•
48-port SFP line card
•
48-port RJ-45 line card
•
Power supplies (AC and DC)
•
Fan tray
•
SFP transceiver
•
SFP+ transceiver
The SRE module and SF module are hot-removable or hot-pluggable depending on the
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
All the line cards are hot-removable and hot-insertable. However, we recommend that
you take them offline before removing them.
The AC and DC power supplies, fan tray, SFP transceiver, and SFP+ transceiver in EX8200
switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs: you can remove and replace them
without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
switch, follow instructions in “Removing an SRE Module from an EX8208 Switch” on
switch, follow instructions in “Removing an SF Module from an EX8208 Switch” on
EX8208 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX8200
EX8208 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX8200
Related Topics
•
•
Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
The AC power supply in an EX8200 switch is a hot-insertable and hot-removable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). Up to six AC power supplies can be installed in an EX8200
switch. All AC power supplies install in the front of the chassis in the slots provided at
for an EX8216 Switch.
150
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Before you install an AC power supply in the switch:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install an AC power supply
in an EX8200 switch chassis:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
NOTE: Each AC power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power source
outlet.
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, unscrew the screw on the side of the
cover panel in the counterclockwise direction using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1, and remove the cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
3. Taking care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the power supply from its bag.
4. Flip the Enable switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the Standby
position.
5. Unscrew the captive screw in the counterclockwise direction using the Phillips (+)
screwdriver, number 1.
6. Pull the captive screw away from the faceplate of the power supply to release the
latch.
7.
Pull the handle away from the faceplate of the power supply until it is perpendicular
to the faceplate.
NOTE: Power supplies can be installed in any slot. You do not have to install the power
supplies in serial order.
8. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the front of
the switch. Slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply
is fully seated in the slot. Ensure the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent
power supply faceplates or power supply cover panels.
9. Push the handle towards the faceplate of the power supply until it is flush against
the faceplate.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
10. Push the captive screw into the power supply faceplate. Ensure that the screw is
seated inside the corresponding hole on the faceplate.
11. Tighten the captive screw by turning it clockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1. When the screw is completely tight, the latch locks into the switch chassis.
Figure 52: Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX8216 Switch
Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
The DC power supply in an EX8200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). Up to six DC power supplies can be installed in an EX8200
switch. All DC power supplies install in the front of the chassis in the slots provided at
for an EX8216 Switch.
NOTE: EX8208 switches support 2000 W DC power supplies.
EX8216 switches support 3000 W DC power supplies.
Before you install a DC power supply in the switch:
152
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a DC power supply
in an EX8200 switch chassis:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, unscrew the screw on the side of the
cover panel in the counterclockwise direction using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1, and remove the cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
3. Taking care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the power supply from its bag.
4. Flip the Enable switch on the power supply to the Standby position.
5. Unscrew the captive screw in the counterclockwise direction using the Phillips (+)
screwdriver, number 1.
6. Pull the captive screw away from the faceplate of the power supply to release the
latch.
7.
Pull the handle away from the faceplate of the power supply until it is perpendicular
to the faceplate.
NOTE: Power supplies can be installed in any slot. You do not have to install the power
supplies in serial order.
8. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the front of
the switch. Slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply
is fully seated in the slot. Ensure the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent
power supply faceplates or power supply cover panels.
9. Push the handle towards the faceplate of the power supply until it is flush against
the faceplate.
10. Push the captive screw into the power supply faceplate. Ensure that the screw is
seated inside the corresponding hole on the faceplate.
11. Tighten the captive screw by turning it clockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1. When the screw is completely tight, the latch locks into the switch chassis.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 53: Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX8208 Switch
An EX8208 switch has a single, field-replaceable fan tray. The fan tray is a hot-insertable
and hot-removable field-replaceable unit (FRU); you can remove and replace the fan
tray while the switch is running without turning off power to the switch or disrupting
switching functions.
The fan tray installs vertically on the left side on the front of the chassis. A handle on the
front faceplate facilitates handling of the fan tray. There is a spring-loaded latch on the
base of the fan tray that is used to latch the fan tray into the chassis.
Before you begin to install a fan tray:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a fan tray in an
EX8208 switch:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
CAUTION: The fan tray can be removed and replaced while the switch is operating.
However, the fan tray must be replaced within 2 minutes of removing the fan tray to
prevent the chassis from overheating.
154
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Hold the handle of the fan tray with one hand and support the weight of the tray
with the other hand. Align the tray with the fan tray guides on the fan tray slot. Slide
in the fan tray until it is fully seated in the chassis.
You will hear a distinct click sound when the spring-loaded latch locks into the
corresponding hole on the strike plate below the fan tray. The latch must be fully
engaged in the corresponding hole for the fan tray to be securely installed.
Figure 54: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
Installing an SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch
You can install either one or two Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) modules in an
EX8208 switch. The SRE modules install horizontally in the front of the chassis in the
slots labeled SRE0 and SRE1.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: We recommend that you install two SRE modules for redundancy. If you install
only one SRE module, we recommend that you install it in the slot SRE0.
CAUTION: Do not lift the SRE module by holding the ejector levers. The levers cannot
support the weight of the module. Lifting the modules by the levers might bend the
levers, and the bent levers will prevent the SRE module from being properly seated in
the chassis.
Before you begin installing an SRE module in an EX8208 switch:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install an SRE module:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, pull the SRE module
out from the bag.
3. Pull both the ejector levers outward, away from the faceplate of the SRE module,
until they go no further.
4. If the slot has a cover panel on it, unscrew the two screws on either side of the cover
panel counterclockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2. Remove the
cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
5. Carefully align the sides of the SRE module with the guides inside the chassis.
6. Ensuring that the SRE module is correctly aligned, carefully slide it into the chassis
until you feel resistance.
7.
Push both the ejector levers towards the faceplate of the SRE module until the levers
are flush against the faceplate and are fully engaged.
8. Tighten the screws, one on each side of the SRE module, by turning them clockwise
using the Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2. Ensure that the SRE module is fully
seated in the chassis. It must be fully seated in order for it to be powered up.
9. Verify that the SRE module is installed correctly and functioning normally by checking
the LEDs on the faceplate of the SRE module. The ON LED and ST LED should be lit
steady green a few minutes after the SRE module is installed.
If the ON LED is unlit, verify that there are enough power supplies installed. See
supplies are needed, install additional power supplies. See “Installing an AC Power
156
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Supply in an EX8200 Switch” on page 150. If there are enough power supplies in the
switch, remove and install the SRE module again. See “Removing an SRE Module
If the ST LED is lit steady yellow, the SRE module has failed. Remove the module
and install a new SRE module. See “Removing an SRE Module from an EX8208
Figure 55: Installing an SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Installing an SF Module in an EX8208 Switch
You can install either zero Switch Fabric (SF) modules or one SF module in an EX8208
switch depending on the switch configuration you want to have. One SF module is included
The SF module can be installed only in the slot labeled SF. The SF module is keyed so
that it does not fit in any other slot in the chassis.
NOTE: Do not lift the SF module by holding the ejector levers. The levers cannot support
the weight of the module. Lifting the module by the levers might bend the levers. Bent
levers prevent the SF module from being properly seated in the chassis.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Before you begin installing an SF module in an EX8208 switch:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install an SF module:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. If the slot has a cover panel on it, use the Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 to remove
the two screws on each side of the cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
3. Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, pull the SF module
out from the bag.
4. Pull both the ejector levers outwards, away from the faceplate of the SF module,
until they go no further.
5. Align the sides of the SF module with the guides inside the chassis.
6. Ensuring that the module remains correctly aligned, slide the SF module into the
chassis until you feel resistance.
7.
Push both the ejector levers towards the faceplate of the SF module until the levers
are flush against the faceplate and are fully engaged.
8. Tighten the screws on each side of the SF module by turning them clockwise using
the Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2. Ensure that the SF module is fully seated in
the chassis.
9. Verify that the SF module is installed correctly and functioning normally by checking
the LEDs on the faceplate of the SF module. The ST LED and SF LED should be lit
steady green a few minutes after the SF module is installed.
If the ST LED is unlit, check whether there are enough power supplies installed. See
supplies are needed, install additional power supplies. See “Installing an AC Power
Supply in an EX8200 Switch” on page 150. If there are enough power supplies in the
switch, remove and install the SF module again. See “Removing an SF Module from
If the ST LED or the SF LED is lit steady yellow, the SF module has failed. Remove
the SF module and install a new one. See “Removing an SF Module from an EX8208
158
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Figure 56: Installing an SF Module in an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX8200 Switch
The line cards for EX8200 switches are rigid sheet-metal structures that house the line
card components including network ports. The line cards are shipped in a cardboard
carton, secured with foam packing material.
CAUTION: The line cards are maximally protected inside the shipping carton. Do not
unpack the line cards until you are ready to install them in the switch chassis.
Before you unpack a line card:
•
Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see
•
Ensure that you know how to handle and store the line card (see “Handling and Storing
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
1.
Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible.
2. Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.
3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.
4. Pull out the packing material, which holds the line card in place.
5. Remove the line card from the antistatic bag.
6. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship
the line card later.
Figure 57: Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing a Line Card in an EX8200 Switch
EX8200 switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) line cards that can be installed in
the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are hot-insertable
and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch
or disrupting switch functions.
Before you begin installing a line card in the switch:
•
Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent Electrostatic discharge
(ESD) damage (see “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series
•
If there are any transceivers installed in the line card, remove them before you install
the line card. For instructions on removing transceivers, see “Removing a Transceiver
160
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
•
•
Ensure that you know how to handle and store the line card (see “Handling and Storing
Ensure the switch has sufficient power to power the line card while maintaining its N+1
or N+N power configuration:
•
EX8208 Switch Components” on page 111 or Power Requirements for EX8216 Switch
Components.
•
To determine whether the switch has enough power available for the line card, use
the show chassis power-budget-statistics command if your switch is running Junos
OS Release 10.2 or later. If your switch is running Junos OS Release 10.1 or earlier, see
Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch to calculate the available power.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a line card in the
switch:
•
ESD grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To install a line card in the switch:
1.
Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
location on EX8208 and EX8216 switches.
Figure 58: Location of the ESD Point on an EX8200 Switch Chassis
2. If the line card slot has a cover panel on it, use the screwdriver to remove the captive
screws on each side of the cover panel. Save the cover panel and the screws for later
use.
CAUTION: Do not lift the line card by holding the ejector levers on the faceplate or the
edge connectors. The levers cannot support the weight of the line card. Lifting the line
card by the levers might bend them. Bent levers prevent line cards from being properly
seated in the chassis.
3. Taking care not to touch line card components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the line card from its bag.
4. Grasp the ejector levers on the faceplate of the line card and pull them outward until
they are fully open. The closed and the open positions of the shorter ejector levers
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
are not as markedly distinguishable as those of the longer ones (see Figure 59 on
page 162).
Figure 59: Closed and Open Positions of the 2-in. Ejector Lever
Closed
Open
Line card
Ejector lever
5. Place one hand around the faceplate of the line card and the other hand under the
line card to support it.
CAUTION: The line cards in EX8200 switches weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg). Be
prepared to support the full weight as you slide the line card into the chassis.
Before you slide the line card into the slot on the switch chassis, ensure the line card is
aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the line card
unusable.
6. Lift the line card, and position it in the chassis with the faceplate facing you and the
sides of the line card aligned with the guides in the line card slot on the switch chassis.
7.
slide the line card fully into the slot using both hands.
NOTE: You might need to lift the line card slightly to seat it correctly in the slot.
8. Grasp the ejector levers on the line card and push them inward simultaneously until
Figure 60: Installing a Line Card with a 2-in. Ejector Lever
Captive
screw
EX8200-40XS
Ejector
levers
162
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Figure 61: Installing a Line Card with a 4-in. Ejector Lever
9. Tighten the captive screws on the faceplate of the line card by using the screwdriver.
10. Verify that the ON LED starts blinking in green. When the ON LED is lit steadily, the
line card is ready for use. If the ON LED does not blink or is not lit steadily, see
CAUTION: After the ON LED is lit steadily, wait for at least 30 seconds before installing
another line card or removing a line card.
You can verify that the line card is functioning correctly by issuing the show chassis fpc
and show chassis fpc pic-status commands.
NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or
upgrade of hardware components at
do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note applies
if you change the type of line card. It does not apply if you replace these components
with the same type of component.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: On an EX3200 switch, if you install a transceiver in a 1-gigabit uplink module
port, a corresponding network port from the last four built-in ports is disabled. For
example, if you install a transceiver in the 1-gigabit uplink module port 2 (ge-0/1/3),
then built-in port 23 (ge-0/0/23) is disabled. The disabled port is not listed in the output
of show interface commands.
Before you begin installing a transceiver in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.
Figure 62 on page 165 shows how to install an SFP transceiver. The procedure is the same
for all transceiver types.
To install a transceiver in an EX Series switch:
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not
touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.
1.
Remove the transceiver from its bag.
2. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not,
cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or
removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental
exposure to laser light.
3. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover,
remove the dust cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are
hot-swapping a transceiver, wait for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver
from the port before installing a transceiver.
4. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors
must face the switch chassis.
CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure the transceiver is aligned
correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver unusable.
5. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated.
6. Remove the rubber safety cap when you are ready to connect the cable to the
transceiver.
164
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
Figure 62: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch
EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you
can connect fiber-optic cables.
Before you begin connecting a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an
EX Series switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling
To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch:
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
1.
If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered by a rubber safety cap, remove the cap.
Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 63: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver
Installed in an EX Series Switch
Transceiver
Fiber-optic cable
4. Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess
cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables
maintain their shape.
CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened loops
of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at the fastening point.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
166
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 10
Connecting the Switch
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, you must connect the switches to earth ground before you connect
them to power.
For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the
protective earthing terminal on the EX Series switch chassis to connect to the earth
Figure 64: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch
Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal of an EX Series
switch, ensure that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding lug to
the grounding cable.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the
switch.
Follow the procedure that applies to your switch:
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch
The protective earthing terminal is located on the rear of the chassis in an EX2200 switch
and in an EX3200 switch.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. For EX2200 switches, see AC Power Cord
Specifications for EX2200 Switches. For EX3200 switches, see AC Power Cord
Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Grounding cable for your switch—The grounding cable must be minimum 14 AWG
(2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
•
Grounding lug for your grounding cable—The grounding lug required is a Panduit
LCD6-14BH-L or equivalent.
•
Washers and 10-32x.25-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
NOTE: SomeearlymodelsofEX3200switchesrequire10-24x.25-in. screwsratherthan
10-32x.25-in. screws. If the Juniper Networks product number on the label next to the
protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx, the switch requires
10-24x.25-in. screws.
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To connect earth ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 switch:
1.
Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
168
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch
The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX4200
switch.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. See AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200
and EX4200 Switches.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Grounding cable for your EX4200 switch—The grounding cable must be minimum
14 AWG (2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
•
Grounding lug for your grounding cable—The grounding lug required is a Panduit
LCD6-14BH-L or equivalent.
•
Washers and 10-32x.25-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
NOTE: Some early models of EX4200 switches require 10-24x.25-in. screws rather
than 10-32x.25-in. screws. If the Juniper Networks product number on the label next to
the protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx through 750-030xxx, the switch
requires 10-24x.25-in. screws.
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To connect earth ground to an EX4200 switch:
1.
Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
If you mounted an EX4200 switch on four posts of a rack using the four-post
rack-mount kit, the protective earthing terminal on the switch is accessible through
NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switch mounted on four posts
is available only if the rack is 27.5 in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switch mounted
flush with the rack front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5 in. deep for a switch mounted
2 in. recessed from the rack front.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 65: Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a
Four-Post Rack
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4500 Switch
The protective earthing terminal is located on the left rear of the chassis in an EX4500
switch.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. See AC Power Cord Specifications for an
EX4500 Switch.
NOTE: If you plan to mount your switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, mount your
switch in the rack or cabinet before attaching the grounding lug to the switch. See
Mounting an EX4500 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Grounding cable for your EX4500 switch—The grounding cable must be 14 AWG
(2 mm²), minimum 90°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
•
Grounding lug for your grounding cable. See Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications
for EX4500 Switches.
170
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
•
•
Washers and 10-32x.25-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To connect earth ground to an EX4500 switch:
1.
Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
NOTE: If you mounted the switch on four posts of a rack using the four-post rack-mount
kit, the protective earthing terminal on the switch is accessible through the slot on the
left rear bracket.
The protective earthing terminal on the switch mounted on four posts is available only
if the rack is 27.5 in. deep through 30.5 in. deep for a switch mounted flush with the rack
front and 29.5 in. deep through 32.5 in. deep for a switch mounted 2 in. recessed from
the rack front.
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8208 Switch
The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX8208
switch.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord Specifications for an
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Grounding cable for your EX8208 switch—The grounding cable must be 6 AWG
(13.3 mm²), minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
•
Grounding lug for your grounding cable. See “Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications
•
Washers and ¼-20x.75-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To connect earth ground to an EX8208 switch:
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
1.
Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch
There are two protective earthing terminals on an EX8216 switch: one on the left side of
the chassis and the other on the rear of the chassis. Only one of the two protective earthing
terminals needs to be permanently connected to earth ground.
An AC-powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord
appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord Specifications for an
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Grounding cable for your EX8216 switch—The grounding cable must be 2 AWG
(33.6 mm²), minimum 60°C wire, or as permitted by the local code.
•
Grounding lug for your grounding cable. See “Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications
•
Washers and ¼-20x.5/8-in. screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing
terminal
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
To connect earth ground to an EX8216 switch:
1.
Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack
in which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
172
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
•
•
•
Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch
EX8200 switches can be configured with up to six AC power supplies. After you have
installed at least one power supply, you can connect power to the switch.
CAUTION: Mixing different types of power supplies in the same chassis is not a supported
configuration.
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power source outlet.
Before you begin to connect power to the switch:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
•
Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
CAUTION: To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and
to ensure proper operation, EX8200 switches must be adequately grounded before
they are connected to power.
For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the
protective earthing terminal on the EX8200 switch chassis to connect to the earth
ground. For instructions on connecting an EX8200 switch to ground using a separate
An EX8200 switch gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the
switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for
your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch”
•
Install power supplies in the switch. See “Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX8200
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect power to the
switch:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Power cords appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power Cord
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
WARNING: Ensure that the power cords do not block access to switch components or
drape where people can trip on them.
To connect AC power to an EX8200 switch:
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Ensure that the power supply is fully inserted and latched securely in the chassis.
3. Flip the Enable switch, which is next to the appliance inlet on the power supply
faceplate, to the Standby position.
4. Squeeze the two sides of the power cord retainer clip, and insert the L-shaped ends
of the clip into the holes in the bracket on each side of the AC appliance inlet on the
Figure 66: Power Cord Retainer in an AC Power Supply
5. Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the switch; the cords have plugs
appropriate for your geographical location.
6. Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the AC appliance inlet on the AC power
supply faceplate.
NOTE: If the power cord tray is installed, you can thread the power cord through the
7.
Push the cord (close to the coupler end) into the slot in the adjustment nut of the
power cord retainer. Rotate the nut until it is tight against the base of the coupler
and the slot in the nut is turned 90° from the top of the switch. See Figure 67 on
8. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.
9. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.
10. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the ON (|) position.
174
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
11. Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply faceplate is lit and is on steadily.
12. Repeat steps 2 through 11 for the remaining power supplies.
Figure 67: Connecting the Power Supply Cord to an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch
An EX8200 switch can be configured with up to six DC power supplies. After you have
installed at least one power supply, you can connect power to the switch.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is removed
from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the
panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position,
and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
NOTE: EX8208 switches support 2000 W DC power supplies.
EX8216 switches support 3000 W DC power supplies.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an incorrectly
attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short circuit).
CAUTION: Mixing different types of power supplies in the same chassis is not a supported
configuration.
NOTE: A 2000 W DC power supply requires a dedicated 60 A circuit breaker for each
input DC feed.
A 3000 W DC power supply requires a dedicated 100 A circuit breaker for each input
DC feed.
NOTE: Each power supply input feed must be connected to a dedicated DC power
source outlet.
Before you begin connecting DC power to an EX8200 switch:
•
Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see
•
Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
CAUTION: To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and
to ensure proper operation, you must connect EX8200 switches to earth ground before
you connect them to power. For installations that require a separate grounding conductor
to the chassis, use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to
earth ground. For instructions on connecting an EX8200 switch to ground using a
separate grounding conductor, see “Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch”
•
Install the power supply in the chassis. See “Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX8200
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect DC power to an
EX8200 switch:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
DC power source cables (not provided) with the cable lugs (provided) attached.
The provided cable lugs in an EX8208 switch are sized for 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) power
source cables. The DC power source cables that you provide must be 6 AWG (13.3
mm2), minimum 60°C wire. We recommend that you install heat-shrink tubing insulation
around the power cables and lugs.
176
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
The provided cable lugs in an EX8216 switch are sized for 2 AWG (33.6 mm2) power
source cables. The DC power source cables that you provide must be 2 AWG (33.6
mm2), minimum 60°C wire. We recommend that you install heat-shrink tubing insulation
around the power cables and lugs.
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) nut driver or socket wrench
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
Multimeter
•
•
•
WARNING: Ensure that the power cords do not block access to switch components or
drape where people can trip on them.
To connect DC power to an EX8200 switch:
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Flip the Enable switch on the power supply faceplate to the Standby position.
NOTE: It might be necessary to slide each power supply partially out of the chassis, in
order to easily connect the DC power source cables to the DC power input terminals.
3. Remove the plastic cable cover from the DC power input terminals, using the number
Figure 68: Removing the Plastic Cable Cover on a DC Power Supply in an
EX8200 Switch
4. Remove the washers and nuts from each DC power input terminal, using the
3/8-in. (9.5 mm) nut driver or socket wrench to loosen the nuts. Leave the bolts
installed on the input terminals.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
5. Ensure that the power source circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the
DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads do not become active
while you are connecting DC power.
6. Verify that the DC power cables are correctly labeled before making connections to
the power supply. In a typical power distribution scheme where the return is connected
to chassis ground at the battery plant, you can use a multimeter to verify the
resistance of the –48V and RTN DC cables to chassis ground:
•
The cable with very high resistance (indicating an open circuit) to chassis ground
is negative (–) and will be installed on the –48V (input) DC power input terminal.
•
The cable with very low resistance (indicating a closed circuit) to chassis ground
is positive (+) and will be installed on the RTN (return) DC power input terminal.
CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity. The
power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There is no
standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external DC
power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables
that attach to the DC power input terminals on each power supply.
7.
Install each power cable lug on the DC power input terminal, securing it first with a
(3.3 Nm) and 31 in.-lb (3.5 Nm) of torque to each nut. (Use the 3/8-in. [9.5 mm] nut
driver or socket wrench.)
a. Secure each positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) DC
power input terminal.
b. Secure each negative (–) DC source power cable lug to the –48V (input) DC
power input terminal.
Each power supply has two independent sets of DC power input terminals (A: –48V
A: RTN and B: – 48V B: RTN ). For feed redundancy, each power supply should be
powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A and feed B. This configuration
provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the switch.
NOTE: If the power cord tray is installed, you can thread the DC power cables through
the power cord tray.
178
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Figure 69: Connecting the Power Supply Cables to an EX8200 Switch
8. Install the plastic cable cover over each set of power cables, using the number 2
Figure 70: Installing the Plastic Cable Cover on a DC Power Supply in an
EX8200 Switch
9. Ensure that the power supply is fully inserted and latched securely in the chassis.
Related Topics
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
Powering On an EX8200 Switch
Before you power on the switch, ensure that:
•
•
You have installed all required switch components.
You have installed the required number of power supplies to support redundant
operation for the switch configuration (see “Calculating Power Requirements for an
EX8208 Switch” on page 114 or Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch).
•
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to power on the switch:
•
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap.
•
An external management device such as a PC.
•
A cable to connect the external management device to the master Switch Fabric and
Routing Engine (SRE) module's console (CON) port or management (MGMT) port in
an EX8208 switch or the master Routing Engine (RE) module’s console (CON) port
or management (MGMT) port in an EX8216 switch.
For connecting a management device to the console port, see “Connecting an EX Series
Switch to a Management Console” on page 181. For connecting a management device
to the management port, see “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for
To power on the switch:
1.
Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Connect the external management device to the master SRE or master RE module's
management (MGMT) port.
3. Turn on the power to the external management device.
4. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and that each of their
handles is flush against the faceplate.
5. Ensure that the source power cord is inserted securely into the appliance inlet for
each AC power supply.
If you are using DC power supplies, ensure that the source power cables are connected
to the appropriate terminal: the positive (+) source cable to the return terminal
(RTN) and the negative (-) source cable to the input terminal (-48 VDC).
6. Switch on the site circuit breakers.
180
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
7.
Observe the power supply faceplate LEDs. If the power supply is installed correctly
and functioning normally, the INPUT OK / IN OK and OUTPUT OK / OUT OK LEDs
light and remain constantly lit. The FAIL LED does not light.
Figure 71: Flip the Enable Switch to the ON position
8. Repeat Step 7 for the remaining power supplies installed in the switch.
9. On the external management device, monitor the startup process to ensure that the
system boots properly.
NOTE: After you power on a power supply, wait for at least 60 seconds before you turn
it off. After you power off a power supply, wait for at least 60 seconds before you turn
it back on.
If the system is completely powered off when you switch on a power supply, the SRE
or RE module boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence.
After you power on a power supply, it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators
such as power supply LEDs and the show chassis operational mode CLI command
display to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore any error
indicators that might appear during the first 60 seconds.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console
You can configure and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated console. Every EX
Series switch has a console port with an RJ-45 connector. Use the console port to connect
the EX Series switch to the management console or to a console server. The console
port accepts a cable with an RJ-45 connector.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
181
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. An RJ-45
cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.
Figure 72 on page 182 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the
switch.
Figure 72: Ethernet Cable Connector
NOTE: If your laptop or PC does not have a DB-9 male connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the
RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter.
You must provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.
1.
Connect one end of the Ethernet cable into the console port (labeled CON or
CONSOLE) on the EX Series switch.
For the location of the CON/CONSOLE port on different EX Series switches:
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch.
•
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.
Figure 73: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console
Through a Console Server
Console server
To Console port
(on the switch)
PC
182
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Figure 74: Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management
Console
Laptop CPU
To Console port
(on the switch)
Related Topics
•
•
•
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem
You can connect an EX Series switch to a modem through the console port on the switch.
Before you connect the switch to a modem:
•
Perform the initial setup and configuration of the switch. See “Connecting and
Ensure that you have the following parts available before you begin to connect the switch
to the modem:
•
A modem (not provided)
•
A desktop or notebook computer (not provided)
•
An RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter and an Ethernet cable (provided)
•
A phone cable (not provided)
•
If your computer does not have a DB-9 male connector pin, a USB to DB-9 male adapter
(not provided)
•
An adapter to connect the RS-232 DB-25 connector on the modem to the RJ-45 to
DB-9 adapter on the switch (not provided)
This topic describes:
Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch
Before you can connect the switch to a modem, the switch’s serial console speed must
be set to 115200 baud.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: The default serial console speed is 9600 baud.
To change the serial console speed:
1.
Power on the switch. (If the switch is an EX8208 or EX8216 model, see “Powering
On an EX8200 Switch” on page 180.) The loader script starts.
2. You are prompted with:
Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or space bar for command prompt.
Press the Spacebar to pause the switch in the loader state (after the Junos OS has
loaded on the switch but before the software starts).
The loader> prompt appears.
3. Set the baud rate:
loader> set baudrate=115200
Press Enter.
4. Press Enter when you see the following message:
Switch baud rate to 115200 bps and press Enter.
The loader> prompt reappears.
5. Save the new serial console speed:
loader> save
Press Enter. The serial console speed is now set to 115200 baud.
6. Boot the software:
loader> boot
The boot process proceeds as normal and ends with a login prompt.
Configuring the Modem
Before you connect the modem, you must configure the modem with required port
settings.
NOTE: ThefollowingprocedureusesHayes-compatible-modemcommandstoconfigure
the modem. If your modem is not Hayes-compatible, see the documentation for your
modem for the equivalent modem commands.
To configure the modem:
1.
Connect the modem to the desktop or notebook computer.
2. Power on the modem.
184
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
3. From the computer, start your asynchronous terminal emulation application (such
as Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal) and select the COM port to which the modem
is connected (for example, COM1).
Table 54: Port Settings
Port Settings
Bits per second
Data bits
Value
115200
8
Parity
None
1
Stop bits
Flow control
None
5. In the HyperTerminal window, type at. Press Enter.
The modem sends an OK response to verify that it can communicate successfully
with the COM port on your desktop or notebook computer.
6. To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring, type ats0=1 at the prompt.
Press Enter.
7.
To configure the modem to accept modem-control DTR signals, type at&d1 at the
prompt. Press Enter.
8. To disable flow control on the modem, type at&k0 at the prompt. Press Enter.
9. To set the fixed serial port speed on the modem, type at&b1 at the prompt. Press
Enter.
NOTE: You must set the serial port to the fixed speed so that the modem will not adjust
the serial port speed to the negotiated line speed.
10. To save the new modem settings, type at&w0 at the prompt. Press Enter.
The modem sends an OK message. The modem is now ready to be connected to
the switch.
Connecting the Modem to the Console Port
The console port on every EX Series switch accepts a cable with an RJ-45 connector.
Figure 75 on page 186 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the
switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 75: Ethernet Cable Connector
NOTE: If your laptop or PC does not have a DB-9 male connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or PC directly to the switch, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9
female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB-9 male adapter. You must
provide the USB to DB-9 male adapter.
NOTE: Most modems have an RS-232 DB-25 connector. You must separately purchase
an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter and Ethernet cable
supplied with the switch.
To connect a modem to the console port:
1.
Turn off power to the switch.
2. Turn off power to the modem.
3. Connect one end of the cable to the console port (labeled CON or CONSOLE) on the
switch.
For the location of the console port on different EX Series switches:
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch.
•
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.
4. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter supplied
with your switch.
5. Connect the serial port adapter to the DB-9 female to DB-25 male adapter or other
adapter appropriate for your modem.
6. Plug the modem adapter into the DB-25 connector on the modem.
7.
Connect one end of the phone cable to the modem and the other end to your
telephone network.
8. Turn on the power to your modem.
9. Power on the switch.
186
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
You can monitor and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated management channel.
EX Series switches have a management port with an RJ-45 connector for out-of-band
management. Use the management port to connect the EX Series switch to the
management device.
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. One such
the Ethernet cable supplied with the switch.
Figure 76: Ethernet Cable Connector
1.
Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port (labeled MGMT)
on the EX Series switch.
For the location of the MGMT port on different EX Series switches:
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.
•
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch.
•
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.
•
•
See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 77: Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band
Management
Management PC
To Management port
(on the switch)
Management PC
Management
network
Management PC
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX2200 Switch
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX4500 Switch
188
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 11
Performing Initial Configuration
•
•
•
EX8200 Switch Default Configuration
Each EX8200 switch is programmed with a factory default configuration that contains
the values set for each configuration parameter when a switch is shipped. The default
configuration file sets values for system parameters such as the ARP aging timer, the
system log, and file messages, while also enabling the LLDP protocol, the RSTP protocol,
IGMP snooping, and storm control.
When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that
becomes the active configuration. You can always revert to the factory default
configuration. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
This topic shows the factory default configuration file of an EX8200 switch:
system {
arp {
aging-timer 5
}
}
syslog {
user * {
any emergency;
}
file messages {
any notice;
authorization info;
}
file interactive-commands {
interactive-commands any;
}
}
commit {
factory-settings {
reset-chassis-lcd-menu;
}
}
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
}
protocols {
igmp-snooping {
vlan all;
}
lldp {
interface all;
}
rstp;
}
ethernet-switching-options {
storm-control {
interface all;
}
}
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuration Files Terms
Understanding Configuration Files for EX Series Switches
EX8216 Switch Hardware Overview
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)
There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through
the console using the CLI and the other is using the J-Web interface. This topic describes
the CLI procedure.
NOTE: To run the ezsetup script, the switch must have the factory default configuration
as the active configuration. If you have configured anything on the switch and want to
run ezsetup, revert to the factory default configuration. See Reverting to the Default
Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
Before you begin connecting and configuring an EX Series switch through the console
using the CLI:
•
Set the following parameter values in the console server or PC:
•
Baud Rate—9600
•
Flow Control—None
•
Data—8
•
Parity—None
190
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Performing Initial Configuration
•
•
Stop Bits—1
DCD State—Disregard
To connect and configure the switch from the console:
1.
Connect the console port to a laptop or PC using the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port
adapter. The RJ-45 cable and RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with
the switch.
•
EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—The console port is located on the rear panel
of the switch.
•
EX4500 switch—The console port is located on the front panel of the switch.
•
EX8200 switch—The console port is located on the Switch Fabric and Routing
Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the Routing Engine
(RE) module in slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.
2. At the Junos OS shell prompt root%, type ezsetup.
3. Enter the hostname. This is optional.
4. Enter the root password you plan to use for this device. You are prompted to re-enter
the root password.
5. Enter yes to enable services like Telnet and SSH. By default, Telnet is not enabled
and SSH is enabled.
NOTE: When Telnet is enabled, you will not be able to log in to an EX Series switch
through Telnet using root credentials. Root login is allowed only for SSH access.
6. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:
NOTE: On EX4500 and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option
is available.
•
Configure in-band management. In this scenario you have the following two options:
•
Use the default VLAN.
•
Create a new VLAN—If you select this option, you are prompted to specify the
VLAN name, VLAN ID, management IP address, and default gateway. Select
the ports that must be part of this VLAN.
•
Configure out-of-band management. Specify the IP address and gateway of the
management interface. Use this IP address to connect to the switch.
7.
Specify the SNMP Read Community, Location, and Contact to configure SNMP
parameters. These parameters are optional.
8. Specify the system date and time. Select the time zone from the list. These options
are optional.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
The configured parameters are displayed. Enter yes to commit the configuration.
The configuration is committed as the active configuration for the switch. You can now
log in with the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch. If you use
the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is redirected to
the new management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the J-Web interface
displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX4500 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)
There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through
the console using the CLI and the other is using the J-Web interface. This topic describes
the J-Web procedure.
NOTE: Before you begin the configuration, enable a DHCP client on the management
PC you will connect to the switch so that the switch can obtain an IP address
dynamically.
NOTE: Read the following steps before you begin the configuration. You must complete
the initial configuration using EZSetup within 10 minutes. The switch exits EZSetup
after 10 minutes and reverts to the factory default configuration, and the PC loses
connectivity to the switch.
•
EX2200 switch—The LEDs on the network ports on the front panel blink when the
switch is in the initial setup mode.
•
EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 switch—The LCD displays a count-down timer
when the switch is in initial setup mode.
192
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Performing Initial Configuration
To connect and configure the switch using the J-Web interface:
1.
Transition the switch into initial setup mode:
•
EX2200 switch—Press the mode button located on the lower right corner of the
front panel for 10 seconds.
•
EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 switch—Use the Menu and Enter buttons
Figure 78: LCD Panel in an EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, or EX8200 Switch
1.
Press the Menu button until you see MAINTENANCE MENU. Then press the
Enter button.
2. Press Menu until you see ENTER EZSetup. Then press Enter.
If EZSetup does not appear as an option in the menu, select Factory Default
to return the switch to the factory default configuration. EZSetup is displayed
in the menu only when the switch is set to the factory default configuration.
3. Press Enter to confirm setup and continue with EZSetup.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the switch.
•
EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—Connect the cable to port 0 (ge-0/0/0) on
the front panel of the switch.
•
EX4500 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the front panel
of the switch.
•
EX8200 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the Switch Fabric
and Routing Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the
Routing Engine (RE) module in slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.
These ports are configured as the DHCP server with the default IP address, 192.168.1.1.
The switch can assign an IP address to the management PC in the IP address range
192.168.1.2 through 192.168.1.253.
3. From the PC, open a Web browser, type http://192.168.1.1 in the address field, and
press Enter.
4. On the J-Web login page, type root as the username, leave the password field blank,
and click Login.
5. On the Introduction page, click Next.
6. On the Basic Settings page, modify the hostname, the root password, and date and
time settings:
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Enter the hostname. This is optional.
•
•
•
Enter a password and reenter the password.
Specify the time zone.
Synchronize the date and time settings of the switch with the management PC or
set them manually by selecting the appropriate option button. This is optional.
Click Next.
7.
Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:
NOTE: On EX4500 and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option
is available.
•
In-band Management—Use VLAN 'default' for management.
Select this option to configure all data interfaces as members of the default VLAN.
Click Next. Specify the management IP address and the default gateway for the
default VLAN.
•
In-band Management—Create new VLAN for management.
Select this option to create a management VLAN. Click Next. Specify the VLAN
name, VLAN ID, member interfaces, management IP address, and default gateway
for the new VLAN.
•
Out-of-band Management—Configure management port.
Select this option to configure only the management interface. Click Next. Specify
the IP address and default gateway for the management interface.
8. Click Next.
9. On the Manage Access page, you may select options to enable Telnet, SSH, and
SNMP services. For SNMP, you can configure the read community, location, and
contact.
10. Click Next. The Summary screen displays the configured settings.
11. Click Finish.
The configuration is committed as the active switch configuration. You can now log in
with the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch.
If you use the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is
redirected to the new management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the
J-Web interface displays instructions for starting a J-Web session.
194
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: Performing Initial Configuration
NOTE: After the configuration is committed, the connectivity between the PC and the
switch might be lost. To renew the connection, release and renew the IP address by
executing the appropriate commands on the management PC or by removing and
reinserting the Ethernet cable.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX4500 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
196
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
198
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 12
Removing the Switch
•
•
•
•
Powering Off an EX8200 Switch
Before you power off the switch:
•
Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge damage. See
•
Ensure that you do not need to forward traffic through the switch.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to power off the switch:
•
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
An external management device such as a PC
•
A cable to connect the external management device to the console port (CON) or
management port (MGMT) on the master Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE)
module in an EX8208 switch or on the master Routing Engine (RE) module in an EX8216
switch.
To power off a switch:
1.
Connect a management device to the master SRE module in an EX8208 switch or
to the master RE module in an EX8216 switch. For connecting a management device
to the console (CON) port, see “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management
Console” on page 181. For connecting a management device to the management
(MGMT) port, see “Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band
2. If the switch has two SRE or RE modules, shut down the backup SRE or RE module
first. (If your switch has only one SRE or RE module, skip to Step 2.) From the external
management PC connected to the master SRE or RE module, issue the request
system halt other-routing-engine operational mode CLI command.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
199
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
This command shuts down the backup SRE or RE module gracefully. A message
displays on the console confirming that the backup SRE/RE module has halted.
3. Shut down the master SRE or RE module from the external management device by
issuing the request system halt operational mode CLI command. This command
shuts down the switch gracefully and preserves system state information. A message
displays on the console confirming that the operating system has halted.
You will see the following output (or something similar, depending on the hardware
being shutdown) after entering the command:
Halting re1
*** FINAL System shutdown message from user@switch***
System going down IMMEDIATELY
Shutdown NOW!
[pid 859]
user@switch> JWaiting (max 60 seconds) for system process `vnlru' to stop...done
Waiting (max 60 seconds) for system process `bufdaemon' to stop...done
Waiting (max 60 seconds) for system process `syncer' to stop...
Syncing disks, vnodes remaining...2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 done
syncing disks... All buffers synced.
Uptime: 3h3m49s
recorded reboot as normal shutdown
The operating system has halted. Please press any key to reboot.
CAUTION: The final output of any version of the request system halt command is the
“The operating system has halted. Please press any key to reboot” message. Wait at
least 60 seconds after first seeing this message before following the instructions in
step 5 to power off the switch.
4. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
5. Flip the power supply Enable switch to the off position (OFF). Observe the power
supply LEDs. The power supply LEDs should turn off (appear unlit). Repeat this step
for all installed power supplies.
NOTE: After you power off a power supply, wait for at least 60 seconds before you turn
it back on. After you power on a power supply, wait for at least 60 seconds before you
turn it back off.
Related Topics
•
•
•
200
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Removing the Switch
Removing an EX8208 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet
If you want to move an installed EX8208 switch to another location, you need to remove
it from the rack or cabinet in which it is installed. In a four-post rack, an installed switch
rests on adjustable mounting brackets bolted to the rack. In a two-post rack, an installed
switch rests on the lip of the power cord tray installed in the rack. The front-mounting
brackets (“ears”) attached to the chassis are also bolted to the rack.
NOTE: When you remove multiple switches from a rack or cabinet, remove the switch
in the top of the rack or cabinet first and proceed to remove the rest of the switches
from top to bottom.
CAUTION: At least three people must be available to lift an unloaded switch chassis
(all components removed) out of a rack or cabinet. For instructions on removing a
switch without using a mechanical lift, see “Removing an EX8208 Switch from a Rack
Before removing an EX8208 switch from a rack or a cabinet:
•
Ensure that the rack or cabinet is stable and secured to the building.
•
Ensure that there is enough space to place the removed switch in its new location and
along the path to the new location.
•
•
Ensure that the switch has been safely powered off (see “Powering Off an EX8200
Switch” on page 199) and that you have unplugged (disconnected) the power cords.
•
Ensure that you have disconnected any cables or wires attached to the switch ports.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the switch:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws, for mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet.
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1, to remove the power supplies from the chassis if
you are mounting the switch without using a mechanical lift
To remove an EX8200 switch from a rack or cabinet:
1.
Use the appropriate Phillips (+) screwdriver to remove the mounting screws that
attach the chassis front-mounting brackets to the rack or cabinet.
2. Place the removed screws in a labeled bag. You will need them when you reinstall
the chassis.
3. Lift the chassis from the rack or cabinet and place it on a mechanical lift. For
instructions on how to remove the chassis using a mechanical lift, see “Removing
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
mechanical lift is not available, remove all components and manually lift the empty
chassis out of the rack. For instructions on removing the chassis without using a
mechanical lift, see “Removing an EX8208 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Without
Related Topics
•
•
Removing an EX8208 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Using a Mechanical Lift
Because of the switch's size and weight, we strongly recommend using a mechanical lift
to remove the switch. For instructions on removing a switch without using a mechanical
Before you remove the switch using a lift:
•
Ensure that the rack or cabinet is stable and secured to the building.
•
Ensure that there is enough space to place the removed switch in its new location and
along the path to the new location.
•
•
Ensure that the switch has been safely powered off (see “Powering Off an EX8200
Switch” on page 199) and that you have unplugged (disconnected) the power cords to
the power supplies.
•
Ensure that you have disconnected any cables or wires attached to the switch ports.
CAUTION: When removing more than one switch from a rack or cabinet, remove the
switch in the top of the rack or cabinet first and proceed to remove the rest of the
switches from top to bottom.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the switch:
•
A mechanical lift
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws
202
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Removing the Switch
1.
Use the appropriate Phillips (+) screwdriver to remove the 24 mounting screws that
attach the chassis front-mounting brackets to the rack or cabinet.
2. Move the lift to the rack and position it so that its platform is centered about 0.5 in.
(1.27 cm) below the bottom of the switch chassis and as close to it as possible.
3. Carefully slide the switch from the adjustable mounting brackets attached to the
rack onto the lift.
4. Use the lift to transport the switch to its new location.
Figure 79: Removing an EX8208 Switch Chassis Using a Mechanical Lift
Related Topics
•
Removing an EX8208 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical Lift
If you cannot use a mechanical lift to remove the switch (the preferred method), you can
remove it manually.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
203
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: The chassis with only the backplane and no other components weighs
approximately 89 lb (41 kg). Lifting the chassis and removing it from a rack or cabinet
requires at least three people.
The chassis has two handles. Do not lift a fully loaded chassis by the handles; make
sure the chassis is empty before you lift it. If two of the people lifting the chassis use
the handles to lift it, the third person must lift from the rear of the chassis. The rear of
the chassis is heavier than the front of the chassis, so when you lift the chassis by the
handles, the chassis tips toward the heavier back end. The person lifting from the back
must be aware of this behavior and must be braced to prevent the chassis from tipping
over.
When lifting the chassis, do not grasp the switch by the blue panel at the top front of
the chassis. Doing so can cause the panel to pop off of the switch.
CAUTION: When removing more than one switch from a rack, remove the switch at the
top first. We strongly recommend removing a switch that is in an upper position in a
rack or cabinet with a lift.
Before you remove the switch:
•
Ensure that the rack or cabinet is stable and secured to the building.
•
Ensure that there is enough space to place the removed switch in its new location and
along the path to the new location.
•
Review chassis lifting guidelines as described in “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX8200
•
Ensure that the switch has been safely powered off (see “Powering Off an EX8200
Switch” on page 199) and that you have unplugged (disconnected) the power cords to
the power supplies.
•
Ensure that you have disconnected any cables or wires attached to the switch ports.
•
Remove all components except the backplane from the chassis. See:
•
•
•
•
•
204
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: Removing the Switch
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the switch:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws
1.
Use the appropriate Phillips (+) screwdriver to remove the 24 mounting screws that
attach the chassis front-mounting brackets to the rack or cabinet.
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your
back. Do not twist your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your
footing is firm.
2. With one person on each side and one person in the back, hold onto the bottom of
the chassis and carefully lift it out of the adjustable mounting brackets attached to
the rack. If you have a pallet jack, move the switch onto the pallet jack.
Figure 80: Removing an EX8208 Switch Chassis Without Using a
Mechanical Lift
3. Carefully move the chassis to its new location.
After you move the switch to its new location, reinstall the components in the chassis or
store the components in antistatic bags. See:
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
•
Related Topics
•
206
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 13
Removing Switch Components
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX8200 Switch
The AC power supply in an EX8200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). You remove AC power supplies from the front of the chassis.
CAUTION: Before you remove a power supply, ensure that you have power supplies
sufficient to power the switch left in the chassis. See “Calculating Power Requirements
for an EX8208 Switch” on page 114 or Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216
Switch.
Before you remove an AC power supply from the switch:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove an AC power
supply from an EX8200 switch chassis:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Replacement power supply or a cover panel for the power supply slot
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long time while the switch
is operational. Either replace the power supply promptly or install a cover panel over
the empty slot.
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Flip the Enable switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the Standby
position.
3. Disconnect power from the switch by performing one of the two following tasks:
•
If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF position.
•
If the AC power source outlet does not have a power switch, gently pull the male
end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet out of the outlet.
4. Remove the power cord from the AC appliance inlet on the AC power supply
faceplate.
5. Turn the adjustment nut of the power cord retainer counterclockwise till you can
see the power cord. Pull the power cord from the slot in the adjustment nut.
6. Squeeze the two sides of the power cord retainer clip, and pull the L-shaped ends
of the clip from the holes on each side of the AC appliance inlet to completely remove
the power retainer clip.
7.
Unscrew the captive screw counterclockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1.
8. Pull the captive screw away from the faceplate of the power supply to release the
latch.
9. Pull the handle away from the faceplate of the power supply until it is perpendicular
to the faceplate.
10. Taking care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
place one hand under the power supply to support it. Grasp the power supply handle
with your other hand and pull the power supply completely out of the chassis.
11. If you are not replacing the power supply, install the cover panel over the slot, using
the Phillips (+) screwdriver to tighten the screw on the side of the cover panel.
208
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Figure 81: Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX8200 Switch
The DC power supply in an EX8200 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). You remove DC power supplies from the front of the chassis.
NOTE: EX8208 switches support 2000 W DC power supplies.
EX8216 switches support 3000 W DC power supplies.
CAUTION: Before you remove a power supply, ensure that you have power supplies
sufficient to power the switch left in the chassis. See “Calculating Power Requirements
for an EX8208 Switch” on page 114 and Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216
Switch.
Before you remove a DC power supply from the switch:
•
Ensure that you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a DC power supply
from an EX8200 switch chassis:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
•
•
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) nut driver or socket wrench
Replacement power supply or cover panel for the power supply slot
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long time while the switch
is operational. Either replace the power supply unit promptly or install a cover panel
over the empty slot.
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cables leads is 0 V and that
there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.
3. Flip the Enable switch on the power supply to the Standby position.
4. Unscrew the screw counterclockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2,
on each of the plastic cable covers that shield the input terminal studs.
Figure 82: Remove the Plastic Cable Cover
6. Unscrew the nuts counterclockwise using the 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) nut driver or socket
wrench from the input terminal studs.
7.
Remove the cable lugs and washers from the input terminal studs.
8. Unscrew the captive screw counterclockwise using the Phillips (+) screwdriver,
number 1.
9. Pull the captive screw away from the faceplate of the power supply to release the
latch.
210
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
10. Pull the handle away from the faceplate of the power supply until it is perpendicular
to the faceplate.
11. Taking care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
place one hand under the power supply to support it. Grasp the power supply handle
with your other hand and pull the power supply completely out of the chassis.
12. If you are not replacing the power supply, install the cover panel over the slot, using
the Phillips (+) screwdriver to tighten the screw on the side of the cover panel.
Figure 83: Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX8200 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX8208 Switch
An EX8208 switch has a single, field-replaceable fan tray. The fan tray is a hot-removable
and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU); you can remove and replace the fan
tray while the switch is running without turning off power to the switch or disrupting
switching functions.
CAUTION: Do not remove the fan tray unless you have a replacement fan tray available.
The fan tray is installed vertically on the left side on the front of the chassis.
Before you remove a fan tray:
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a fan tray from
an EX8208 switch chassis:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Replacement fan tray
CAUTION: The fan tray can be removed and replaced while the switch is operating.
However, the fan tray must be replaced within 2 minutes of removing the fan tray to
prevent overheating of the chassis.
1.
Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
2. Pull the spring-loaded latch, located at the base of the fan tray, upwards until the
latch is completely free from the corresponding hole on the strike plate.
3. Hold the handle of the fan tray with one hand while holding the latch up with the
other. Pull firmly on the handle to slide the fan tray about 5 in. (13 cm) out of the
chassis.
WARNING: There is no fan guard on the fans. Be careful to keep your fingers clear of
the moving fan blades when you are removing the fan tray. To avoid injury, do not touch
the fans with your hands or any tools as you slide the fan tray out of the chassis—the
fans might still be spinning.
4. Wait for approximately 15 seconds to allow all the fans to stop spinning.
5. Release the latch and use that hand to support the weight of the fan tray. Slide the
fan tray completely out of the chassis.
212
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Figure 84: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
•
Taking the SRE Module Offline in an EX8208 Switch
Before removing a Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module from an EX8208
switch, take the module offline.
The SRE module performs switching and system management functions in an EX8208
switch. Your switch can have either one or two SRE modules.
This topic describes:
•
•
Taking an SRE Module Offline in a Switch with Redundant SRE Modules
To take an SRE module offline in a switch with two SRE modules:
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
1.
Determine whether the SRE module is the master or backup using one of these
methods:
•
Look at the MS (master) LED on the SRE module faceplate. If the MS LED is lit
steady green, the SRE module is the master. If it is blinking green, the SRE module
is the backup.
•
Issue the following CLI command:
user@switch> show chassis routing-engine
Routing Engine status:
Slot 0: Current state Master
Election priority Master (default) ...
2. If the SRE module that you want to remove is the master, make it the backup module:
user@switch> request chassis routing-engine master switch
3. From the master, halt the other Routing Engine:
user@switch> request system halt other-routing-engine
4. Wait a minute or two for the Routing Engine to halt before proceeding. If you are
using a console connection, you will see a message when the system is halted. If the
Routing Engine has not yet halted, the following step returns an error.
5. Take the SRE module offline:
user@switch> request chassis cb offline slot slot-number
where slot-number is either 0 (slot SRE0) or 1 (slot SRE1).
6. (Optional) Confirm that the SRE module is offline:
user@switch> show chassis environment cb
If the state field in the command output shows that the module is offline, then it is safe
to remove the SRE module.
Taking an SRE Module Offline in a Switch With One SRE Module
To take the SRE module offline:
Connect to the console port on the SRE module.
1.
2. From the console, halt the SRE module:
user@switch> request system halt
The RE module is gracefully halted but not powered off.
When a message appears confirming that the operating system has halted, it is safe to
remove the SRE module. The Routing Engine might take up to 5 minutes to gracefully
halt.
Related Topics
•
•
•
214
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Removing an SRE Module from an EX8208 Switch
You must remove the Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module from the EX8208
switch chassis if you need to replace the module or if you need to remove switch
components before moving the chassis without using a mechanical lift.
CAUTION: Do not lift the SRE module by holding the ejector levers. The levers cannot
support the weight of the module. Lifting the module by the levers might bend the
levers. Bent levers will prevent the SRE module from being properly seated in the chassis.
Before you begin to remove an SRE module:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove an SRE module:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
•
Antistatic bag or antistatic mat
•
Replacement SRE module or cover panel for the SRE module slot
1.
2. Attach the antistatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
3. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
4. Loosen the screws on each side of the SRE module by turning them counterclockwise
using the screwdriver until they are completely unseated.
5. Pull both the ejector levers outwards, away from the faceplate of the SRE module,
until they go no further. This action causes the SRE module to slide out of the chassis
slightly.
6. Grasp the ejector levers and pull the SRE module out to about halfway.
7.
Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, place one hand
underneath the SRE module to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis.
8. Place the SRE module in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
9. If you are not replacing the SRE module, place the cover panel over the empty slot,
insert the screws through the holes on each side of the cover panel, and tighten the
screws with the screwdriver.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 85: Removing an SRE Module from an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Taking the SF Module Offline in an EX8208 Switch
The SF module provides switching functionality for an EX8208 switch. Your switch can
have either zero SF modules or one SF module.
NOTE: If you take the SF module offline in a switch configuration having only one Switch
Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module, throughput will be low.
To take the SF module offline:
1.
Take the SF module offline:
user@switch> request chassis cb offline slot 2
For an SF module, the control board slot number is always 2.
2. (Optional) Confirm that the SF module is offline:
user@switch> show chassis environment cb slot-number
The state field in the command output shows that the SF module is offline. It is now
safe to remove or replace the SF module.
Related Topics
•
216
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
•
•
Removing an SF Module from an EX8208 Switch
You must remove the Switch Fabric (SF) module from the EX8208 switch if you need
to replace the module or if you need to remove the switch components before moving
the chassis without using a mechanical lift.
The SF module is always installed in the slot labeled SF.
NOTE: Do not lift the SF module by holding the ejector levers. The levers cannot support
the weight of the module. Lifting the modules by the levers might bend the levers. Bent
levers will prevent the SF module from being properly seated in the chassis.
Before you begin to remove an SF module:
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove an SF module:
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
•
Antistatic bag or antistatic mat
•
Replacement SF module or cover panel for the slot
1.
2. Attach the electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis.
3. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
4. Loosen the screws on each side of the SF module by turning them counterclockwise
using the screwdriver until they are completely unseated.
5. Pull both the ejector levers outwards, away from the faceplate of the SF module,
until they go no further. This action causes the SF module to slide out of the chassis
slightly.
6. Grasping the ejector levers, pull the SF module to about halfway out.
7.
Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, place one hand
underneath the SF module to support it and slide it out of the chassis completely.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
8. Place the SF module in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
9. If you are not replacing the SF module, install the cover panel over the empty slot
by tightening the screws on each side of the cover panel with the screwdriver.
Figure 86: Removing an SF Module from an EX8208 Switch
Related Topics
•
•
Removing a Line Card from an EX8200 Switch
EX8200 switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) line cards that can be installed in
the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are hot-insertable
and hot-removable: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch
or disrupting switch functions.
Before you begin removing a line card from an EX8200 switch:
•
Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent Electrostatic discharge
(ESD) damage (see “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series
•
If there are any transceivers installed in the line card, remove them before you remove
•
Ensure that you know how to handle and store the line card (see “Handling and Storing
218
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a line card from
an EX8200 switch chassis:
•
ESD grounding strap
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
•
An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat
•
Replacement line card or a cover panel and its captive screws to cover the empty slot
To remove a line card from an EX8200 switch:
1.
Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
location on EX8208 and EX8216 switches.
Figure 87: Location of the ESD Point on an EX8200 Switch Chassis
3. Label the cables connected to each port on the line card so you can reconnect the
cables to the correct ports.
4. Take the line card offline by issuing the following CLI command:
user@switch> request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline
5. Remove the captive screws on the faceplate of the line card by using the screwdriver.
6. Grasp the ejector levers on the faceplate of the line card and pull them outward
simultaneously until they are in the open position and the line card is fully unseated.
The closed and the open positions of the shorter ejector levers are not as markedly
Figure 88: Closed and Open Positions of the 2-in. Ejector Lever
Closed
Open
Line card
Ejector lever
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
7.
Grasp the ejector levers and gently slide the line card halfway out of the chassis (see
Figure 89: Removing a Line Card with a 2-in. Ejector Lever
Captive
screw
EX8200-40XS
Ejector
levers
Figure 90: Removing a Line Card with a 4-in. Ejector Lever
CAUTION: Do not lift the line card by holding the ejector levers on the faceplate or the
edge connectors. The levers cannot support the weight of the line card. Lifting the line
cards by the levers might bend them. Bent levers prevent the line cards from being
properly seated in the chassis.
CAUTION: Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any other
component. Place each line card separately in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic
mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
CAUTION: The line cards in EX8200 switches weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg). Be
prepared to support the full weight as you slide the line card out of the chassis.
8. Place one hand around the faceplate of the line card and the other hand under the
line card to support it. Taking care not to touch line card components, pins, leads,
or solder connections, gently slide the line card completely out of the chassis and
place it in an antistatic bag or on its own antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable
surface.
220
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
CAUTION: After removing a line card, wait for at least 30 seconds before installing a
line card or removing another line card.
9. If you are not installing a line card in the emptied line card slot within a short time,
install a blank cover panel over the slot and secure it with captive screws by using
the screwdriver. Do this to protect the interior of the chassis from dust or other foreign
substances and to ensure that the airflow inside the chassis is not disrupted.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch
EX Series switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical transceivers to which you
can connect fiber-optic cables.
Before you begin disconnecting a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed
in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe
handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver
•
A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector
To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the switch:
1.
Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the command:
[edit interfaces]
user@switch# set interface-name disable
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.
3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or
removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental
exposure to laser light.
4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
Before you begin removing a transceiver from an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat
•
Needlenose pliers
•
Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector
•
A dust cover to cover the port
Figure 91 on page 223 shows how to remove an SFP transceiver. The procedure is the same
for all transceiver types.
To remove a transceiver from an EX Series switch:
1.
Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
222
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or
removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental
exposure to laser light.
CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Cable from an EX Series Switch” on page 221). Cover the transceiver and the end of
each fiber-optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately after
disconnecting the fiber-optic cables.
4. Using your fingers, pull the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
CAUTION: Before removing the transceiver, make sure you open the ejector lever
completely until you hear it click. This prevents damage to the transceiver.
5. Using the needlenose pliers, pull the ejector lever out from the transceiver.
6. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately
0.5 in. (1.3 cm) straight out of the port.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not
touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.
7.
Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the
port.
8. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.
9. Place the dust cover over the empty port.
Figure 91: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
Related Topics
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Removing the Power Cord Tray from a Rack or Cabinet for an EX8200 Switch
You can remove the power cord tray from a rack or cabinet. (The remainder of this topic
uses “rack” to mean “rack or cabinet.”)
In two-post rack installations, we recommend that you do not remove the power cord
tray unless you are also removing the switch and that you remove the switch before you
remove the power cord tray.
NOTE: The EX8216 switch can be installed only in a four-post rack. Installation in a
two-post rack is not supported.
If you remove the power cord tray before removing the EX8208 switch from a two-post
rack, there is no support for the underside of the switch. This creates a problem if and
when you need to remove the switch, because the chassis has no support once you
remove the screws that hold the front-mounting brackets to the rack. In a four-post rack
this is not an issue because the switch rests on the adjustable mounting brackets.
Before you begin to remove the power cord tray:
•
Ensure no power cables are resting on or threaded through the power cord tray.
•
Remove the switch if the switch and power cord tray are installed on a two-post rack.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the power cord
tray:
•
A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1, 2, or 3, depending on the size of your rack mounting
screws
To remove the power cord tray:
1.
Use the appropriate Phillips (+) screwdriver to remove the four mounting screws
that hold the power cord tray in the rack.
2. Remove the power cord tray and store it in the original switch accessory box for later
use.
Related Topics
•
224
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
226
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 14
Routine Maintenance
•
•
•
•
Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX8200 Switches
Components in the line cards are fragile. To avoid damaging the line cards, follow the
procedures in this topic. The procedures use the following terms to describe the four
Figure 92: Edges of the Line Cards in an EX8200 Switch
•
Faceplate—Edge of the line card that has connectors into which you insert the
transceivers or RJ-45 cables.
•
Connector edge—Edge opposite the faceplate.
•
Top edge—Edge at the top of the line card when the line card is vertical.
•
Bottom edge—Edge at the bottom of the line card when the line card is vertical.
CAUTION: Failure to handle line cards as specified in these procedures can cause
irreparable damage to them.
This topic describes the following tasks:
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Holding a Line Card
You must hold a line card horizontally when installing it in the chassis. You may hold a
line card vertically or horizontally when carrying it.
CAUTION: The line cards in EX8200 switches weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg). Be
prepared to support the full weight as you slide the line card into the chassis.
To hold a line card vertically:
1.
Orient the line card so that the faceplate faces you. To verify the orientation, confirm
that the text on the line card is right-side up.
2. Place one hand around the line card faceplate about a quarter of the way down from
the top edge. Do not press hard on it.
3. Place the other hand at the bottom edge of the line card.
If the line card is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate
and your right hand along the bottom edge.
To hold a line card horizontally:
1.
Orient the line card so that the faceplate faces you.
2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand.
You can rest the faceplate of the line card against your body as you carry it.
CAUTION: Take care not to hit the line card against any object as you carry it. Line card
components are fragile.
Never hold or grasp the line card anywhere except the places mentioned in these
228
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
Figure 93: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge
Never carry the line card while holding the faceplate with only one hand.
Do not rest any edge of a line card directly against a hard surface (see Figure 94 on
page 229).
Figure 94: Do Not Rest the Edge of a Line Card on a Hard Surface
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
If you must rest a line card temporarily on an edge, place a cushion between the edge
and the surface.
Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any other component. Place
each line card separately in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.
Storing a Line Card
You must store a line card in the chassis or in a spare shipping container, horizontally and
sheet metal side down. Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any
other component. Place each line card separately in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic
mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
NOTE: Because the line card is heavy, and because antistatic bags are fragile, inserting
the line card into the bag is best done with two people, each to do one of the following
steps.
To insert a line card into an antistatic bag:
1.
Hold the line card in the horizontal position with the faceplate facing you.
2. Slide the opening of the bag over the line card connector edge.
If you must insert the line card into a bag by yourself:
1.
Lay the line card horizontally on a flat, stable surface, sheet metal side down.
2. Orient the line card with the faceplate facing you.
3. Carefully insert the line card connector edge into the opening of the bag and pull the
bag toward you to cover the line card.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
230
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX8200 Switches
Components in the line cards are fragile. To extend the lives of your line card cables and
to avoid problems that can result from cable damage, follow these procedures:
To maintain line card cables in EX8200 switches:
•
Place excess cable out of the way. Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle
from the connector. Placing fasteners on the loops helps retain their shape.
•
Keep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles, which can cause
drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary
before connecting an interface.
•
Label both ends of line card cables to identify them.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in EX Series Switches
Fiber-optic cables connect to optical transceivers that are installed in EX Series switches.
To maintain fiber-optic cables:
•
When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over
the transceiver and on the end of the cable.
•
Anchor fiber-optic cables to avoid stress on the connectors. When attaching a
fiber-optic cable to a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it is
not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang
free from the connector.
•
Avoid bending fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. Bending fiber-optic
cables into arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and
cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
•
Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cables in and out of optical instruments
can damage the instruments, which are expensive to repair. Attach a short fiber
extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
231
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easier and less
expensive to replace than the instruments.
•
Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Micro-deposits of oil and dust in the canal
of the transceiver or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power,
and possibly intermittent problems with the optical connection.
To clean the transceiver canal, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device such as RIFOCS
Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the directions in the
cleaning kit you use.
After cleaning the transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable
is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such as the
Opptex Cletop-S® Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions in the cleaning kit you use.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
232
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
Removing a Battery from an EX8208 Switch for Recycling
The EX8208 switch contains a CR2032 2.7-volt lithium battery on each Switch Fabric
and Routing Engine (SRE) module installed in the chassis. The coin-shaped battery is
approximately 0.75in. (20 mm) in diameter. The battery is estimated to last for over 50
years.
A base configuration switch has one SRE module, and a redundant configuration switch
has two modules installed. Before recycling an SRE module or the switch chassis, remove
the battery from each SRE module for battery recycling.
Before you begin to remove the battery:
•
Power off the switch or take the SRE module offline. If only one SRE module is installed
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
•
Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
1.
Attach the antistatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Locate the SRE module in the switch chassis.
3. With the screwdriver, loosen the captive screws on each side of the SRE module by
turning them counterclockwise until they are completely unseated.
4. Pull both ejector levers outwards, away from the faceplate of the SRE module, until
they go no further. This action causes the module to slide slightly out of the chassis.
5. Grasp the ejector levers, and pull the SRE module out to about halfway.
6. Place one hand underneath the module to support it, and slide it completely out of
the chassis.
7.
Locate the coin-shaped CR2032 battery on the right side of the module near the
8. With your finger, pry the battery out of its socket.
9. If you are recycling the entire chassis of a redundant configuration, repeat Steps 2
through 8 for the second SRE module.
10. Recycle the battery or batteries as required.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
236
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 15
Troubleshooting Switch Components
•
Troubleshooting Line Card Installation on EX8200 Switches
Problem The ON LED on a line card does not blink in green or is not lit steadily after the line card
is installed in an EX8200 switch.
Cause One or both of these has caused these problems:
•
The switch does not have sufficient power to power the line card while maintaining its
N+1 or N+N power configuration.
•
The line card is not seated correctly in the slot in the switch chassis.
Solution 1.
If the ON LED does not blink in green:
•
Ensure the switch has sufficient power to power the line card while maintaining
its N+1 or N+N power configuration:
•
•
for EX8208 Switch Components” on page 111 or Power Requirements for EX8216
Switch Components.
To determine whether the switch has enough power available for the line card,
use the show chassis power-budget-statistics command if your switch is running
Junos OS Release 10.2 or later. If your switch is running Junos OS Release 10.1 or
or Calculating Power Requirements for an EX8216 Switch to calculate the
available power.
•
2. If the ON LED blinks in green, but is not lit steadily, tighten the captive screws on the
faceplate of the line card.
Related Topics
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
•
238
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
240
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 16
Returning the Switch or Switch
Components
•
•
•
•
•
Returning an EX8200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, follow this procedure:
1.
Determine the serial number of the component. For instructions, see “Locating the
NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained
an RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not
have an RMA. Refused shipments are returned to the customer through collect freight.
For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at
Related Topics
•
•
EX8216 Switch Hardware Overview
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Locating the Serial Number on an EX8200 Switch or Component
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, you must locate the serial number of the switch or component. You must
provide the serial number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC)
when you contact them to obtain Return Materials Authorization (RMA). See “Contacting
If the switch is operational and you can access the command-line interface (CLI), you
can list serial numbers for the switch and for some components with a CLI command. If
you do not have access to the CLI or if the serial number for the component does not
appear in the command output, you can locate the serial number ID label on the physical
switch or component.
NOTE: If you want to find the serial number on the physical switch component, you will
need to remove the component from the switch chassis, for which you must have the
required parts and tools available. See “Installing and Removing EX8208 Switch
Components.
Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI
To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, use the show chassis
hardware CLI command:
The following output lists the switch components and serial numbers for an EX8208
switch:
user@switch> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version Part number Serial number
Description
EX8208
EX8208-BP-S
EX8208-SRE320
RE-EX8208
Chassis
Backplane
CB 0
Routing Engine 0
CB 1 REV 01
Routing Engine 1
CB 2
FPC 3
CPU
PIC 0
Xcvr 0
REV 01
REV 01
REV 07
BT0307470122
BT0307470122
BE0108230079
BUILTIN
710-022044
710-020635
BUILTIN
710-020635
BUILTIN
BE0108030010
BUILTIN
EX8208-SRE320
RE-EX8208
REV 07
REV 08
REV 06
710-021502
710-016837
710-020598
BUILTIN
AZ0108200057
BB0108270097
BF0108250177
BUILTIN
EX8208-SF320
EX8200-8XS
EX8200-CPU
8x 10GE SFP+
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
740-021308
740-021308
740-021308
740-021308
740-021308
740-021308
88D709A00110
88D709A00249
88D709A00099
88D709A00139
88D709A00246
88D709A00126
Xcvr 1
Xcvr 2
Xcvr 3
Xcvr 4
Xcvr 5
242
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Xcvr 6
Xcvr 7
PSU 3
REV 01
REV 01
REV 04
REV 04
740-021308
740-021308
740-021466
740-021466
88D709A00136
88D709A00137
BG0708390050
BG0708390054
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
EX8200-AC2K
EX8200-AC2K
PSU 4
Fan Tray
FTC 0
FTC 1
The following output lists the switch components and serial numbers for an EX8216
switch:
user@switch> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version Part number Serial number
REV 05
Description
EX8216
EX8216-MP
EX8216-RE320
RE-EX8216
Chassis
Midplane
CB 0
REV 05
REV 11
710-016845
710-020771
BUILTIN
BA0908390026
AX0108370040
BUILTIN
Routing Engine 0
CB 1
REV 11
710-020771
BUILTIN
AX0108370027
BUILTIN
EX8216-RE320
RE-EX8216
Routing Engine 1
FPC 9
CPU
PIC 0
FPC 10
CPU
REV 06
REV 03
710-020680
710-020598
BUILTIN
BD0108160009
AE0108150045
BUILTIN
EX8200-48T
EX8200-CPU
48x 10/100/1000 Base-T
EX8200-8XS
REV 08
710-016837
BB0108270097
FPC 13
CPU
PIC 0
Xcvr 0
Xcvr 2
FPC 14
REV 06
REV 03
710-016837
710-020598
BUILTIN
740-021308
740-021308
710-016837
710-020598
BUILTIN
740-021308
740-021308
710-020683
710-020598
BUILTIN
BB0108160016
AE0108150079
BUILTIN
83D303A00092
87D709A00153
BB0108270115
BF0108260254
BUILTIN
87D709A00037
87D709A00063
BC0108170021
BF0107510006
BUILTIN
EX8200-8XS
EX8200-CPU
8x 10GE SFP+
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-S
EX8200-8XS
EX8200-CPU
8x 10GE SFP+
SFP+-10G-SR
SFP+-10G-SR
EX8200-48F
REV 01
REV 01
REV 08
REV 06
CPU
PIC 0
Xcvr 0
Xcvr 2
FPC 15
CPU
PIC 0
Base-X
REV 01
REV 01
REV 05
REV 01
EX8200-CPU
48x 100 Base-FX/1000
Xcvr 0
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
E08E04433
E08E04378
E08E04364
E08E04380
E08E04374
E08E04385
E08E04362
E08E04371
E08E04376
E08E04367
E08E04384
E08E04377
E08E04373
E08E04369
E08E04361
E08E04379
E08E04372
E08E04431
E08E04382
E08E04386
E08E04435
E08E04375
E08E04365
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
Xcvr 1
Xcvr 2
Xcvr 3
Xcvr 4
Xcvr 5
Xcvr 6
Xcvr 7
Xcvr 8
Xcvr 9
Xcvr 10
Xcvr 11
Xcvr 12
Xcvr 13
Xcvr 14
Xcvr 15
Xcvr 16
Xcvr 17
Xcvr 18
Xcvr 19
Xcvr 20
Xcvr 21
Xcvr 22
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Xcvr 23
Xcvr 24
Xcvr 25
Xcvr 26
Xcvr 27
Xcvr 28
Xcvr 29
Xcvr 30
Xcvr 31
Xcvr 32
Xcvr 33
Xcvr 34
Xcvr 35
Xcvr 36
Xcvr 37
Xcvr 38
Xcvr 39
Xcvr 40
Xcvr 41
Xcvr 42
Xcvr 43
Xcvr 44
Xcvr 45
Xcvr 46
Xcvr 47
REV 01
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
740-011613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
710-021613
740-021466
740-021466
740-021466
E08E04370
E08C02744
E08E04432
E08C02583
E08E04381
E08C02582
E08E04368
E08E04346
E08E04396
E08C02584
E08E04395
E08E04350
E08E04391
E08E04437
E08E04389
E08E04356
E08E04383
E08E04357
E08E04434
E08E04351
E08E04366
E08E04388
E08E04387
E08E04390
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
SFP-SX
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 01
REV 02
REV 02
REV 02
REV 02
REV 02
REV 05
REV 05
REV 05
REV 04
REV 01
REV 02
E08E03899
SFP-SX
SIB 0
SIB 1
SIB 2
SIB 3
SIB 4
SIB 5
SIB 6
SIB 7
AY0108210025
AY0108210022
AY0108210010
AY0108210008
AY0108210015
AY0108350042
AY0108360190
AY0108350154
BG0708390040
BG0700000000
BG070820002G
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8216-SF320
EX8200-AC2K
EX8200-AC2K
EX8200-AC2K
PSU 0
PSU 2
PSU 4
Top Fan Tray
FTC 0
FTC 1
REV 05
REV 05
760-022620
760-022620
AE0108310233
AE0108310208
EX8216-FT
EX8216-FT
Bottom Fan Tray
FTC 0
FTC 1
REV 05
REV 05
760-022620
760-022620
AE0108310177
AE0108310123
EX8216-FT
EX8216-FT
Locating the Serial Number ID Label on an EX8200 Switch Chassis
The serial number ID label is located near the bottom on the left side of the chassis on
244
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 96: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on EX8208 Switch
Chassis
The serial number ID label is located near the bottom on the left side of the chassis on
Figure 97: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on EX8216 Switch
Chassis
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Locating Serial Number ID Labels on FRU Components
The power supplies, fan tray, SRE modules, RE modules, SF module, and line cards
installed in an EX8200 switch are field-replaceable units (FRUs). For each of these FRUs,
you must remove the FRU from the switch chassis to see the FRU’s serial number ID label.
•
2000 W AC Power supply—The serial number ID label is on the left side of the power
Figure 98: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on a 2000 W AC Power
Supply
•
3000 W AC Power supply—The serial number ID label is on the right side of the power
246
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 99: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on a 3000 W AC Power
Supply
•
DC Power supplies—The serial number ID label is on the left side of the DC power
Figure 100: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on 2000 W DC Power
Supply and 3000 W DC Power Supply
•
Fan tray in an EX8208 switch—The serial number ID label is on the rear of the fan tray
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 101: Location of the Serial Number ID label on the Fan Tray Used
in an EX8208 Switch
•
Fan trays in an EX8216 switch—The serial number ID label is on the rear of each fan
248
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 102: Location of the Serial Number ID label on the Fan Tray Used
in an EX8216 Switch
•
Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) module in an EX8208 Switch— See Figure
103 on page 249 to see the location of the serial number ID label on the SRE module.
Figure 103: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the SRE Module
•
the location of the serial number ID label on the RE module. See Removing an RE
Module from an EX8216 Switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 104: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the RE Module
•
the location of the serial number ID label on the SF module. See “Removing an SF
Figure 105: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the SF Module Used
in an EX8208 Switch
•
the location of the serial number ID label on the SF module. See Removing an SF
Module from an EX8216 Switch.
250
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 106: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the SF Module Used
in an EX8216 Switch
•
number ID label on this line card. See “Removing a Line Card from an EX8200 Switch”
Figure 107: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the 8-Port SFP+
Line Card
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
251
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
number ID label on this line card. See “Removing a Line Card from an EX8200 Switch”
Figure 108: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the 40-Port SFP+
Line Card
Serial number ID label
•
number ID label on this line card. See “Removing a Line Card from an EX8200 Switch”
Figure 109: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the 48-Port SFP
Line Card
•
number ID label on this line card. See “Removing a Line Card from an EX8200 Switch”
252
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 110: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the 48-Port RJ-45
Line Card
Related Topics
•
•
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series
Switches
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) from Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
After locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you want to return,
open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on the Web or
by telephone.
For instructions on locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you
want to return:
•
See Locating the Serial Number on an EX2200 Switch or Component.
•
See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component.
•
See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4500 Switch or Component.
•
Before you request an RMA from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:
•
Your existing case number, if you have one
•
Serial number of the component
•
Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address
•
Details of the failure or problem
•
Type of activity being performed on the switch when the problem occurred
•
Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on the Web or by telephone:
•
•
Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC1-888-314-5822, toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico
NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll free numbers,
If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next
available support engineer.
The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return
of the component.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Packing an EX2200 Switch or Component for Shipping
Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping
Packing an EX4500 Switch or Component for Shipping
Returning an EX2200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
Returning an EX4500 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
Packing an EX8200 Switch or Component
If you are returning an EX8200 switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, pack the item as described in this topic.
Before you begin packing the switch or component, ensure you have:
•
Followed all the steps listed in “Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return
•
Retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials. Contact your JTAC
representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about approved packing
•
Ensure you understand how to prevent ESD damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic
254
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
This topic describes:
Packing an EX8200 Switch
If you need to transport the switch to another location or return the switch to Juniper
Networks, you need to pack the switch securely in its original packaging to prevent damage
during transportation.
Before you pack the switch:
1.
2. Remove all wires, plugs, and power cords from the switch.
4. Install cover panels over blank slots.
Leave components that came installed in the chassis in the chassis.
NOTE: Any line cards ordered with the switch are shipped separately. Do not pack any
line cards with the switch.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to pack the switch:
•
A 7/16-in. or 11-mm open-end or socket wrench to install the bracket bolts on the chassis
and shipping pallet
•
The original switch packing material (wooden pallet, cardboard box, accessory box
and its contents, foam padding, and brackets and bracket bolts for attaching the
chassis to the pallet)
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
The EX8200 switch is shipped in a cardboard box that has a two-layer wooden pallet
base with foam cushioning between the layers. The switch chassis is bolted to the pallet
base with 4 pallet fasteners, 2 on each side of the chassis.
CAUTION: The switch is maximally protected inside the shipping box. Pack the switch
only in its original shipping box, securely bolted to the original wooden shipping pallet.
Do not pack the switch in anything except its original container or the switch might be
damaged in transit.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
1.
Move the wooden pallet and packing material to a staging area as close to the switch
as possible. Make sure there is enough space to move the chassis from the rack or
cabinet to the wooden pallet.
Lift” on page 203). For EX8216 switches, see Removing an EX8216 Switch from a Rack
or Cabinet.
Move the chassis to the shipping pallet (see “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX8200
Switches” on page 276). Position the switch on the pallet so that the front of the
switch is facing the silkscreened “front” mark on the pallet. The pallet also has crop
marks to guide you in positioning the chassis.
3. Use the 7/16-in. or 11-mm open-end or socket wrench to install the four sets of
brackets and bolts that secure the chassis to the wooden pallet.
4. Slide the plastic cover over the switch chassis. The plastic cover is part of the switch’s
original packing materials.
5. Replace the foam padding on top of the chassis.
6. Place the power cords in the box.
7.
Remove the adjustable mounting brackets from the rack or cabinet and place them
and their connecting screws in the accessory box.
List) for an EX8208 Switch” on page 130 or Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an
EX8216 Switch to verify that you have included all the proper contents of the
accessory box.
9. Slide the cardboard box over the chassis, making sure that the arrows on the box
point up and the pallet fasteners to secure the cardboard box to the wooden pallet
are near the bottom.
10. Attach the cardboard box to the wooden pallet using the four pallet fasteners
(“fins”) in the depression in each pallet fastener, then slide each fastener into its
corresponding slot in the cardboard box and release the ridges to secure the latch.
256
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Figure 111: Insert Pallet Fasteners in the Cardboard Box
11. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 112: Packing an EX8200 Switch
Packing EX8200 Switch Components for Shipping
To pack EX8200 switch components, follow the instructions here. For instructions to
Before you begin packing a switch component, ensure that you have the following parts
and tools available:
•
Antistatic bag, one for each component
•
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
258
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
CAUTION: Do not stack switch components. Return individual components in separate
boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box.
To pack EX8200 switch components:
•
Place individual components in antistatic bags.
•
Use the original packing materials if they are available. If the original packing materials
are not available, ensure the component is adequately packed to prevent damage
during transit. The packing material you use must be able to support the weight of the
component.
•
Ensure that the components are adequately protected by wrapping them well with
packing materials. Pack the component in an oversized box (if the original box is not
available) with extra packing material around the unit so that the component is
prevented from moving around inside the box.
•
Securely tape the box closed.
•
Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX8216 Switch
Packing a Line Card Used in an EX8200 Switch
If you are returning a line card to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement, pack it as
described in this topic.
Before you begin packing a line card:
•
Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage (see
•
Ensure that you know how to handle and store the line card (see “Handling and Storing
•
Retrieve the original shipping carton and packing materials. Contact your JTAC
representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about approved packing
•
Obtain an antistatic bag.
CAUTION: Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any other
component. Place each line card separately in an antistatic bag.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
To pack a line card:
1.
Place the line card in the antistatic bag.
2. Place the line card in the shipping carton.
3. Place the packing foam on top of and around the line card.
4. Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.
5. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Related Topics
•
•
260
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
262
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 17
General Safety Information
•
•
•
•
•
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the EX Series switch from
damage. The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in
your working environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.
•
Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for
this product. Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system
services.
•
Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during, and after
installation.
•
Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.
•
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could
become caught in the chassis.
•
Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous
to your eyes.
•
Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
•
Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
•
Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
•
Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed
for wet environments.
•
Operate the EX Series switch only when it is properly grounded.
•
Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product is
permanently connected to earth.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.
•
Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are
provided in the hardware documentation for this product. Such an action could cause
severe electrical shock.
•
•
•
•
Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an
action could result in electrical shock or fire.
Avoid spilling liquid onto the EX Series switch chassis or onto any switch component.
Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the switch.
Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted
and that the installation screws are fully tightened.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches
The documentation for EX Series switches uses the following levels of safety warnings
(there are two “Warning” formats):
NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or you might
overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.
CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or
discomfort to you or severe damage to the EX Series switch.
WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
264
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: General Safety Information
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in
een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat
werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's
en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.
WARNING: Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi
johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota
selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
ehkäisykeinoista.
WARNING: Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez
dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant
de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits
électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter
les accidents.
WARNING: Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer
Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an
irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen
verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.
WARNING: Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione
potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura,
occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche
standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
WARNING: Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon
som kan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom
på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig
praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.
WARNING: Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que
lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e
com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su
integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña
la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención
de accidentes.
WARNING: Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation
som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara
medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga
skador.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches
In the event of a fire emergency involving switches and other network equipment, the
safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for protecting
people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision
fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a
fire emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable
for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire, safety, and
electrical codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your
equipment.
Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to
the equipment at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive
fire retardants, to extinguish the fire.
Fire Suppression Equipment
266
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: General Safety Information
Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide
and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire extinguishers
displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire
on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling, you should use
this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves
residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers). The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium
phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult to clean. In addition, in the presence of minute
amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and
corrodes most metals.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is
subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to
be irreparably damaged.
NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to
control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks switch. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is
used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.
We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the EX Series
switch.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.
Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.
Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du
personnel qualifié et compétent.
Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder
auswechseln lassen.
Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare
o sostituire questo apparecchio.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut dette
utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por
personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.
Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
kvalificerad personal.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.
Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.
Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.
Related Topics
•
268
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 18
Radiation and Laser Warnings
•
•
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
EX Series switches are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a Class 1
Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1
Laser Product per EN 60825–1 requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
•
•
•
•
General Laser Safety Guidelines
When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following
safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:
•
Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
•
Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
•
Avoid direct exposure to the beam.
WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation. The lens
in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the eye directly
on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the eye.
Class 1 Laser Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 laser product.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
WARNING: Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
Class 1 LED Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 LED product.
Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.
WARNING: Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.
Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.
Laser Beam Warning
WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments.
270
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
WARNING: Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met
optische instrumenten.
WARNING: Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen
avulla.
WARNING: Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide
d'instruments optiques.
WARNING: WarnungNichtdirektindenStrahlblickenundihnnichtdirektmitoptischen
Geräten prüfen.
WARNING: Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per
osservarlo direttamente.
WARNING: Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.
WARNING: Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: ¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con
instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom
optiska instrument.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches
Optical Interface Support in EX4500 Switches
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture of the port
when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into
open apertures.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de
poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling
en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.
WARNING: Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun
kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin
aukkoihin.
WARNING: Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du
port lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas
regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.
WARNING: Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,
wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen
auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
WARNING: Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili
possono essere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni
e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er
åpne, fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en
fiberkabel.
WARNING: Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do
orifício da via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá
evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se
encontrarem a descoberto.
272
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
WARNING: ¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación
invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las
aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.
WARNING: Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten
fiberkabel och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in
i oskyddade öppningar.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
274
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 19
Installation and Maintenance Safety
Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the switch to a power
source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les
directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.
Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema
all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de
alimentación.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess
strömförsörjningsenhet.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX8200 Switches
The weight of a fully loaded EX8208 switch is approximately 284 lb (130 kg) and the
weight of a fully loaded EX8216 switch is approximately 486 lb (220 kg). Observe the
following guidelines for lifting and moving the switch:
•
Before moving the switch to a site, ensure that the site meets the power, environmental,
and clearance requirements specified in the “Site Preparation Checklist for an EX8200
•
Do not attempt to lift the EX8208 switch by yourself. We recommend using a
mechanical lift to install the EX8208 switch in a rack or cabinet. If you cannot use a
lift, you must remove all components from the chassis before lifting and use a minimum
of three people to lift the EX8208 switch chassis. For lifting and component removal
instructions, see “Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a
WARNING: Because of the EX8216 switch’s size and weight, we require the use of a
mechanical lift to install the EX8216 switch in a rack or cabinet or to move the switch
from one location to another.
CAUTION: The EX8208 switch chassis has two handles, one on each side of the chassis.
Do not lift a fully loaded chassis by the handles; make sure the chassis is empty before
you lift it. If two of the people lifting the chassis use the handles to lift it, a third person
must lift from the rear of the chassis. The rear of the chassis is heavier than the front
of the chassis, so when you lift the chassis by the handles the chassis tips toward the
276
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
heavier back end. The person lifting from the back must be aware of this behavior and
be braced to prevent the chassis from tipping over.
•
Before lifting or moving the switch, disconnect all external cables and wires.
•
Do not grasp the switch by the blue panel at the top front of the chassis. Doing so can
cause the panel to detach from the switch.
•
If you are lifting the EX8208 switch, as when lifting any heavy object, ensure that most
of the weight is borne by your legs rather than your back. Keep your knees bent and
your back relatively straight. Do not twist your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly
among the people lifting the switch and be sure that your footing is firm.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: When installing the switch, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.
Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.
Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.
Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.
Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados
Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
277
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches
Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the EX Series switch is installed is evenly and
securely supported. Uneven mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.
WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the switch in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:
•
The switch must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building structure.
•
The switch should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the
rack.
•
When mounting the switch on a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
•
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting
or servicing the switch in the rack.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel
in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale
voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De
onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
•
De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan een
bouwsel is verankerd.
•
Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige
in het rek is.
•
Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van
onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.
•
Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te
monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft.
WARNING: Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa
telineessä, on noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi,
jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
•
Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen.
•
Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
278
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
•
•
Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta
kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen
tai sen huoltamista siinä.
WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de
montage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions
spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont
destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
•
Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à la structure
du bâtiment.
•
Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le
bas.
•
Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de
bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
•
Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant
de monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.
WARNING: Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten
dieser Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
•
Der Juniper Networks switch muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
•
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht
werden.
•
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von
unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen
ist.
•
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.
WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione
di questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza
personale:
•
Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.
•
Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica unità
da montare nel supporto.
•
Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il
supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del
supporto.
•
Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di
montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på
denne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.
Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
•
Juniper Networks switch må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til
bygningsstrukturen.
•
Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i
kabinettet.
•
Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet lastes
fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.
•
Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før
montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.
WARNING: Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta
unidade numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o
sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o
seu trabalho com segurança:
•
O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura do
edificio.
•
Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única
unidade a ser montada.
•
Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais
pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.
•
Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou
reparar a unidade.
280
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
WARNING: ¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un
bastidor, o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado
en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las
siguientes instrucciones:
•
El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del
edificio.
•
Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el
mismo.
•
Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado, comenzar
la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo más pesado
en la parte inferior.
•
Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar
o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.
WARNING: Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför
underhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda
försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer
ges för att trygga din säkerhet:
•
Juniper Networks switch måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i byggnadens
struktur.
•
Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned
på ställningen.
•
Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån
och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
•
Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan
enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting an EX2200 Switch
Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Mounting an EX4500 Switch
Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
281
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The switch is intended to be grounded. During normal use, ensure that you
have connected earth ground to the switch chassis.
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer
tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite on
yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil hôte est relié
à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät
während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il
dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt
bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se encontra
ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal
esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid
normal användning.
Related Topics
•
•
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
While performing the maintenance activities for EX Series switches, observe the following
guidelines and warnings:
•
•
•
•
•
282
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
Battery Handling Warning
WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace a
battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen
wordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de
fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig
fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.
WARNING: Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä
vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan
suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.
WARNING: Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.
Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par
le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
WARNING: Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen
Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des
Herstellers.
WARNING: Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte.
Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser
brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
WARNING: Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata
correttamente. Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal
produttore. Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.
WARNING: Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.
Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo
fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
WARNING: ¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera
incorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones
del fabricante.
WARNING: Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet
med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ
tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
Jewelry Removal Warning
WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove
jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when connected
to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can be welded to the terminals.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische
leidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen.
Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden,
en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de
aansluitklemmen lassen.
WARNING: Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden
parissa, ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien).
Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne
voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.
WARNING: Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques,
ôter tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à
l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut provoquer
des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.
WARNING: Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,
jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.
Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen
werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen
angeschweißt werden.
284
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
WARNING: Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di
alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi).
Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e
massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.
WARNING: Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du
skal arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet
til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader eller
smelte fast til polene.
WARNING: Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de
corrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os
objectos metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação
à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de
alimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de
metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede
ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.
WARNING: Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)
innan du arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas
upp när de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador;
metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.
Lightning Activity Warning
WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
of lightning activity.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet
aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.
WARNING: Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota
kaapeleita ukkosilmalla.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
285
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
WARNING: Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les
câbles pendant un orage.
WARNING: Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an
bzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
WARNING: Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi
durante un temporale con fulmini.
WARNING: Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra
systemet når det tordner eller lyner.
WARNING: Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos
de mau tempo (trovoada).
WARNING: ¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante
el transcurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.
WARNING: Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta
eller koppla loss kablar.
Operating Temperature Warning
WARNING: To prevent the switch from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104° F (40° C). To
prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around the
ventilation openings.
WARNING: WaarschuwingOmtevoorkomendatwelkeswitchvandeJuniperNetworks
router dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de
maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° C wordt overschreden. Om te
voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling rond
de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.
286
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
WARNING: Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä
ei saa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun
ympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on
jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.
WARNING: Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper
Networks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est
supérieureà40°C. Pourpermettreunflotd'airconstant, dégagezunespaced'aumoins
15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.
WARNING: Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf
dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das
empfohlene Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern,
achten Sie darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen
herum frei bleibt.
WARNING: Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in
un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitare che la
circolazione dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte alle
aperture delle ventole.
WARNING: Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks
switch Disse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale
omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringen rundt
lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.
WARNING: Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks
switch, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima
recomendada de 40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos um
espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
WARNING: ¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks
switch se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura
ambiente máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada de
aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilación.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
287
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
WARNING: Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genom att
inte använda den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade
omgivningstemperaturen på 40° C överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks
genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring
ventilationsöppningarna.
Product Disposal Warning
WARNING: Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and
regulations.
WARNING: Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en
voorschriften te worden afgedankt.
WARNING: Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia
valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.
WARNING: Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée
conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.
WARNING: Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften
entsprechend entsorgt werden.
WARNING: Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita
osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia
WARNING: Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til
nasjonale lover og forskrifter.
WARNING: Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo
com os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.
WARNING: ¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas
las leyes y regulaciones nacionales
288
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
WARNING: Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets
alla lagar och föreskrifter.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
289
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
290
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 20
Power and Electrical Safety Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Certain ports on the switch are designed for use as intrabuilding
(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP)
cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning surges and
commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The intrabuilding ports
on the switch are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling
only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a switch, attach an ESD strap
to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure to
use an ESD strap could result in damage to the switch.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
291
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
Install the EX Series switch in compliance with the following local, national, and
international electrical codes:
•
United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States
National Electrical Code.
•
Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1
through Part 7.
•
Evaluated to the TN power system.
•
Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.
•
•
Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that
if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before
grounding connections are made.
•
•
Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace.
Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before
starting to work.
•
•
•
Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded
power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
Operate the EX Series switch within marked electrical ratings and product usage
instructions.
To ensure that the EX Series switch and peripheral equipment function safely and
correctly, use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral
equipment, and make certain they are in good condition.
You can remove and replace many switch components without powering off or
disconnecting power to the switch, as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation
for this product. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches
Switch components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from
static electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You
can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic
or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe
the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:
292
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
•
Always use an ESD grounding strap when you are handling components that are subject
to ESD damage, and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.
If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see Figure
113 on page 293) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch with the
other hand immediately before inserting the component into the switch.
WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap. The
measurement must be in the range of 1 through 10 Mohms.
•
When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed
from the chassis, make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to the
ESD point on the chassis.
If no grounding strap is available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the switch to ground
yourself before handling the component.
•
Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing.
ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.
•
When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage, always place
it component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an
an antistatic bag before packing it.
Figure 113: Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag
CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as category 5e and category 6 can get
electrostatically charged. In order to dissipate this charge, always ground the cables
to a suitable and safe earth ground before connecting them to the system.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for the ESD point location.
See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for the ESD point location.
See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch for the ESD point location.
See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for the ESD point location.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
•
location.
See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the ESD point location.
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches
CAUTION: For switches with AC power supplies, an external surge protective device
(SPD) must be used at the AC power source.
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered switches:
•
Note the following warnings printed on the chassis:
“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT
ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”
“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.
AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
•
AC-powered switches are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a
grounding-type plug that fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent
this safety feature. Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical
codes.
•
You must provide an external certified circuit breaker rated minimum 20 A in the building
installation.
•
The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the switch. The socket
outlet must be near the switch and be easily accessible.
•
For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection, you must
ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the switch
is completely removed to avoid electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power
cords (one for each power supply).
Power Cable Warning (Japanese)
WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.
Related Topics
•
•
294
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Before working on the switch or near power supplies, unplug all the power
cords from an AC switch.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient
u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään
asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation électrique,
débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten, ziehen
Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo
di alimentazione sulle unità CA.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de
fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada.
¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente
de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente
alterna (CA).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du
för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.
Related Topics
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
295
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC-powered switch:
•
A DC-powered switch is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power
requirements of a maximally configured switch.
NOTE: To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source
capable of supplying at least 8 A at –48 VDC for EX3200 and EX4200 switches.
To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable
of supplying at least 60 A at –48 VDC for EX8208 switches.
To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable
of supplying at least 100 A at –48 VDC for EX8216 switches.
Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be sure to
connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground. A closed loop ring is
recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.
•
Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.
•
A DC-powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for
installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a restricted access
area is one in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical
Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker. This
breaker must protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth grounding faults
in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.
•
Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage
the equipment.
•
For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground at both
the switch and the supply side of the DC wiring.
•
The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered switch is the nominal voltage
associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated
with float voltages for the charging function.
•
Because the switch is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive lead to
the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the
earth ground to the chassis grounding points.
Related Topics
•
•
296
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch
DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure that power is
removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker
on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF
position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te
verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar
de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in
de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden
suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin
KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy
KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier que
le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le
disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le
disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée
du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie
den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il
circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito
CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet
likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
297
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og
teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou
a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar
que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito
de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição
a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.
¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda
la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que
alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posición
de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición
de Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att
strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning
är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen
och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches
An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded
branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed
as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit. The grounding conductor is a separately
derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.
WARNING: When you install the switch, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste
worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
298
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être connectée
en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt
und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento
a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles
sist.
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada,
e a última a ser desligada.
¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.
Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
kopplas bort sist.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then –48 V to
–48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN
to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire must always be connected
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN naar
+RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en –48 naar
–48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.
Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten
+RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten – 48 V,
+RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.
Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets
appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
299
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à –48 V. En débranchant la puissance,
l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 V à –48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié pour
rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour
la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché
pour la dernière fois.
Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ringösen an das DC Netzteil
anzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss, +RTN
zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenz zum Abtrennen der
Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN und dann Erdanschluss zu
Erdanschluss. Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss immer zuerst angeschlossen
und als letztes abgetrennt wird.
Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC
usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta
sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e da
negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre
venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.
Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V til –
48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN, jord til jord.
Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en
el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado se
muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces –48 V a –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la
secuencia apropiada del cableado es –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió
para moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y
desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre
primero y desconectar por último.
¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados na
extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é
moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a
seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer.
Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por
último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e
desconectado por último.
Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till –48 V.
Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till jord.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
300
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
•
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such
as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations must be the
appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken
die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of
het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten
dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de
geleider vast te klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää, esimerkiksi
suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt kiinnityskorvat.
Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen
sekä eristeen että johdinosan.
Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et
doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.
Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene
Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig,
mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die
angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter
festklemmen.
Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a
occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la
misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.
Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente
ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbøyde
kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til ledningene, og skal
klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido,
use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito
fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de
cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão prender
simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.
¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables
homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de
conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para
los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
301
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,
t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa
kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen
och ledaren fastklämda.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection,
you must ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to
the switch is completely removed.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches
WARNING: The switch is designed to work with a TN power system.
Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN energiesystemen.
Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.
Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes d'alimentation
TN.
Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.
Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN.
Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.
302
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.
¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo
TN.
Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av
TN-typ.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
In Case of Electrical Accident: Action to Take on an EX Series Switch
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1.
Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.
2. Disconnect power from the switch.
3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition
of the victim, then call for help.
Related Topics
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
303
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
304
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
306
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 21
Compliance Information
•
•
•
•
•
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches
EX Series switches comply with the following standards:
•
Safety
•
CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950–1–03/UL 60950–1. Safety of Information Technology
Equipment
•
•
EN 60950–1:2001. Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 60825–1 Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements and User's Guide
•
EMC
•
FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A (USA)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)
ICES-003 Class A
VCCI Class A (Japan)
AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)
CISPR 22 Class A
EN 55024
EN 300386
EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
307
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
•
EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN 61000-4-2 ESD
EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity
EN 61000-4-4 EFT
EN 61000-4-5 Surge
EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity
EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags
Related Topics
•
•
Battery Compliance Statement for Environmental Requirements for EX Series Switches
EX8200 Ethernet switches contain lithium batteries.
Batteries used in these switches are not based on substances containing mercury, lead,
or cadmium. The batteries used in these switches comply with EU Directives 91/157/EEC,
93/86/EEC, and 98/101/EEC. The product documentation includes instructional
information on the proper method of reclamation and recycling.
Related Topics
•
•
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches
This topic describes the EMC requirements for EX Series switches for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and
308
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21: Compliance Information
safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to
the users’ satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the
equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the
inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means
of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with
the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by
themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician,
as appropriate.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
European Community
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Japan
The preceding translates as follows:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
VCCI-A
United States
The EX Series switch has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
309
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
FCC Part 15 Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.
Non-Regulatory Environmental Standards
NEBS compliance—These EX Series switch models are Network Equipment Building
System (NEBS) compliant:
•
EX2200-24T and EX2200-48T
•
EX3200-24T, EX3200-48T, EX4200-24F, EX4200-24T, and EX4200-48T
•
All EX8200 models
Those switch models meet the following NEBS compliance standards:
•
SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)
•
GR-1089-CORE: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications Equipment
•
GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection
•
The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network
(CBN).
•
The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical
Code (NEC) applies.
•
The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return (DC-I), as
defined in GR-1089-CORE.
Related Topics
•
•
310
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21: Compliance Information
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel
beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779
Translation:
The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779.
Related Topics
•
•
Declaration of Conformity for EX8208 Switches
Related Topics
•
•
•
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
311
Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Ethernet Switches
312
Copyright © 2010, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Ingersoll Rand Pill Reminder Device 650503 User Manual
InSciTek Microsystems Telephone Allworx Phone User Manual
Intel Personal Computer BOXD54250WYK User Manual
JVC Speaker System TH D7 User Manual
JVC Stereo System 0505NYMCREBET User Manual
JVC VCR HR 5910U User Manual
Karcher Pressure Washer T 300 User Manual
Kenmore Vacuum Cleaner 721358205 User Manual
KitchenAid Refrigerator W10233586 User Manual
Kompernass CD Player KH 2262 User Manual